Home

2 - Jeep

1. B Brake System s o erede raa rener Da neea a 278 Premium System If Equipped 306 Anti Lock Brake System ABS General Information 05 310 uL EE 37 Show Dies Lille eniBilgiMPes63 Mak 310 E cain yee Meare seas ape Bl Fuel Requirements 0 000 311 Bi Tire Safety Information 283 Dassin E 311 Tire Markings 00024 00000644 00b0 00044 283 E E E CASSIE eoi carne ri Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 287 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends H Tires General Information 291 MMT In Gasoline L LLL LLL Tire Pressure e cs sos eo R9 291 Materials Added To Fuel L L L BB Tire Chains eco i aa E arme 300 Fuel Systemi Cations sees erer ERES 313 H Tire Rotation Recommendations 300 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 314 Me a eet ee 314 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 0 0 314 Base System If Equipped 304 238 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 316 Trailer And Tongue Weight 322 B Vehicle Loading e kk EE eee ER ERES 317 Towing Requirements rack a een 323 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 317 Towing lips 5260 9 egre mikes 327 B ule Towing sess ee ese egy teres ead 317 W Recreational Towing Common Towing Definitions
2. Drive Belt Check Condition 356 Spark Plugs cese be eh ng 356 Catalytic Converter socs case Renten Crankcase Emission Control System Fuel Filter oc ise cba s m etits Air Cleaner Element Filter Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance 361 Power Steering Fluid Check 362 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Front Suspension Ball Joints 362 Body Lubrication aos eee keds ae le Rear 363 Windshield Wiper Blades 363 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir 364 Exhaust System 0 0 0 cee eee 364 Cooling System cs ces pada pee ea meas 365 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 370 Fuel System Connections 370 Brake System e cqiseo er Gee ed cenit PS 371 Automatic Transaxle CVT 373 Manual Transaxle esses 374 Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD AWD Models Only rk mnm E arias 375 Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD AWD Models Only Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion ll Fuses Integrated Power Module IPM E Vehicle Storage E Replacement Bulbs ll Bulb Replacement Headlamps Fog Lights Tail Lights Rear Turn Signals And Backup Lights Replacement License Lights
3. U S Metric Fuel Approximate 13 5 Gal 510L Engine Oil With Filter AII Gasoline Engines use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil 4 5 qts 4 26 L Cooling System Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Miles Formula or 7 2 qts 6 8 L equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology or equivalent Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Mopar 04884900AB or equivalent ZFR5F 11 Gap 0 043 87 Octane R M 2 Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts Automatic Transaxle CVT Fluid Mopar CVTF 4 Manual Transaxle Fluid Mopar ATF 4 MS9602 Rear Drive Assembly RDA Mopar Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent non synthetic product Power Transfer Unit PTU Mopar Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent non synthetic product Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE
4. If Equipped 2 eR terere 224 Radio Operation 00200005 225 mm CD Player egere reb aora Mt 225 E CD DVD Maintenance llle 226 ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 226 Bl Climate Controls 000000 227 Climate Controls lille leen 227 Air Conditioning 005 230 Air Filtration System If Equipped 231 Operating Tips sies per cad wei as 232 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlet 2 Demisters 3 Instrument Cluster 4 Radio roa 81a575ae 5 Glove Box 9 Hazard Warning Flasher 6 Storage Bin 10 ESP OFF Switch If Equipped 7 Climate Controls 8 Heated Seat Switches If Equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 818da26c 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel GaugelFuel Door Location When the ignition switch is in the ON position EU the pointer will show the level of fuel remain ing in the fuel tank The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located 2 Voltage Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bu
5. Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 29 Hot Car No Fuse Re 34 30 Amp ABS Valve Feed quired Pink 30 20 Amp Heated Seats 35 40 Amp ABS Pump Feed Yellow Green 31 10Amp Headlamp Washer 36 30 Amp Headlamp Washer Red Relay Control Pink Control Smart Glass 32 30 Amp ENG ASD Control 37 25 Amp 110 Inverter Pink Feed 1 Natural 33 10 Amp ABS MOD J1962 Red Conn PCM ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 CAUTION e When installing the IPM cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the IPM and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement
6. 195 203 Rear Axle Differential 00 375 Rear Drive Assembly iles 375 Rear Liftgate Sedan 00 0 33 Rear Seat Folding 00020000 116 Rear Window Defroster 00 163 Rear Window Features lessen 162 Rear Wiper Washer isses 162 Recorder Event Data sek eR er RE 58 Recreational Towing oases llle 329 Refrigerant gue a ka We nc A e a SC RA ed 362 Reminder Seat Belt llle 46 Remote Control Door Eocks i ER ERES e 19 Security Alarm ases see ome RR Bee em car 18 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 19 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 224 Replacement Bulbs 542242 be es 385 Replacement Keys llle 16 Replacement Parts 23e ses eek s iaaii 351 Replacement Tires 298 Reporting Safety Defects 0 413 Restraints Child esl ml IRR 60 66 Restraints Infant sessar ua daea e a ce eee eee 61 Restraints Occupant 0 0004 35 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 0 158 Roll Over Warning socs penere sels 4 Roof Type Carrier ses ee ee ae ER 164 Rotation Tires 00 0000 cece cece eee ee een 300 10 430 INDEX BENE Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 70 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 71 Safety Defects Reporting 413 Safety Information Tire 283 Safety TPS iac chat pee REOR he RO ee ee 69
7. EN STARTING AND OPERATING 285 TIRE SIZING TERMS Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 286 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER TIN The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is
8. 318 Behind Motorhome Etc 0 329 Trailer Hitch Classification 0 20 320 ae ee Liar MEC Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Ground e Shree km a 329 Weight Ratings eee 321 en STARTING AND OPERATING 239 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the shift lever in NEUTRAL NOTE The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor NOTE If the key won t turn and the steering wheel is locked rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the key Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK 240 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Normal Starting Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
9. 171 B Instrument Cluster Descriptions 172 Bl Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped amp cese erem m Rer ed 183 Engine Oil Change Indicator System 184 EVIC Functions uy eR ERES 185 Compass Temperature Audio 186 Average Fuel Economy 186 Distance To Empty DTE Elapsed lime 4i Rn ees Tire Pressure Monitor IPM 187 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fedtit S 12a hasse XE Su 187 ll Radio General Information 193 Radio Broadcast Signals 193 Two Types Of Signals 0 194 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Bi Electronic Digital Clock 0 194 Clock Setting Procedure 195 li Sales Code REF AM FM CD Single Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands Free Phone Capability 195 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 196 Operating Instructions CD Mode 199 Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode 201 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped 0 2603 pee m nnn 202 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped eese aka sakame dee tcs 203 lll Sales Code RAQ AM FM CD 6 Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio
10. 156 Pinch Protect Feature 004 151 Retractable Cargo Area Cover Pinch Protect Override 151 TEEGIIDDSU ea aso pete oie tetas me Venting Sunroof Express sss 151 Removable Load Floor llis 159 Sunshade Operation illus 152 a TIG DOWEL ODDS ud deletum dodi ipii TM Fold Down Speakers If Equipped 161 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 Be Rear Window Features lessen 162 Rear Window Defroster 0 163 Rear Window Wiper Washer 162 lll Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 164 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of vehicle The mirror should be ad justed while set in the day position toward the wind shield Adjusting Rearview Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 Outside Mirror Driver s Side Adjust the flat driver s side outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror Passenger Side Mirror Directions Outside Mirro
11. Clean Air eem sto Ae TS Ca oe Sd 311 Filler Cap Gas Cap 0 000000 314 Filet i ics eco e RECHRERTERICHEEYS 358 Gasoline 6b Aine eee eS Rho RR 311 Gage sg adhe Gea cede ie aC ean d 172 HOSS seactead senos edem arem ed a i edd 370 Light TD 173 Octane Rating iss ezilas ei e Rs 311 Requirements sess ksi spasa AE AE cta 311 System HOSS v e342 dae EEG bea e eem et 370 Tank Capacity ihc ace eese e o dede on d 395 Fuel System Caution s siss eese 317 Fueling 2222 RE RR ERES ies niti 314 FUSES iesu iE a FS ATE PR ee A 382 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 142 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 314 316 349 Gasoline Clean Air llle 311 Gasoline Fuel excess scere eye xa 311 395 TEM 424 INDEX M Gasoline Reformulated sss 312 Gauges Coolant Temperature 0000 177 BUG 54 bue oe a PERDRE idus 172 Odometer leere 179 Tachometer ub gc hee paced Bae ed 174 Gearsbift iu ck uerus Rcx re do SU didus 246 General Information 0 18 109 310 General Maintenance 0 0000 e eee 352 Glass Cleaning 22e ram eer RES 380 Gross Axle Weight Rating 318 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 317 318 Hands Free Phone UConnect 82 Hazard Warning Flasher 4 332 Head Restraints 0 0 0 eee eae 113 Headlights i osse RR n 386 Cleaning Los Ress cr ERES GO PR We 380
12. Fog Lights See your authorized dealer for replacement Tail Lights Rear Turn Signals And Backup Lights Replacement 1 Remove the two push pins from the tail light housing Push Pins Removed Removing Push Pins 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE 2 Grasp the tail light and pull firmly to disengage the 3 Twist and remove socket from the lightl light from the aperture panel 81a2c7bb Removing Socket and Bulb Pulling Lamp From Body ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 4 Remove bulb from socket and replace License Lights 1 Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the snap tab to remove the light from the liftgate 81a2c7e0 Removing Bulb From Socket Prying Lamp from Liftgate 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise E Removing Bulb From Socket Removing Socket From Lamp Center High Mounted Stoplight 3 Pull the bulb from the socket Light is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer for replacement MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Auxiliary Off Road Light 2 Unlatch the wire clasp securing the bulb into the housing and rotate it into the position shown 1 Remove the three screws attaching the lens to the housing 81c68d11 Lens Removal 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Disconnect the bulb from the light harness to replace the bulb Disconnecting Bulb ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
13. Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operating Instructions CD Mode for MP3 Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next MP3 File Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the MP3 file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for MP3 Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push a button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD is being loaded The radio will display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert th
14. WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413 MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Wash ington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish
15. ESP Indicator Light ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 will illuminate and the ESP Off message will appear in the odometer Press and release the Trip Odometer button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message In this mode ESP is turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph 56 km h At 35 mph 56 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode as described above When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph 48 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving however ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 35 mph 56 km h The ESP Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESP is off To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the ESP On mode of operation NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and an audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed into the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESP system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESP Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ESP B
16. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has a switchable retractor it will have a distinctive label To operate the switchable retractor please refer to Automatic Locking Retractor ALR in this section e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e n the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be switched to an automatic locking mode which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME e If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and
17. SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during Winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h FUEL REQUIREMENTS GASOLINE ENGINES Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide excellent fuel economy when using high quality regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended The use of premium gaso line will provide no benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these STARTING AND OPERATING 311 symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the ap propriate octane rating fo
18. Security Alarm Theft Alarm Theft Alarm Security Alarm 176 Traction Control 0 0 0 0 ee eee ee 139 Tam Signal see Rn 121 123 173 389 Moltage ido biete ean rie oes 172 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 172 Loading Vel cle esee ee ees 317 Tires ubinam a me b e Baas earns 287 Locks Child Protection ss resser orerundi nonkaa S 30 DOOR airi kcu ae Res eea Sees aea 26 PowerAJDOOE iu pE TEIE uuu ded A E d 27 Lubrication Body gn 363 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 164 Lumbar Support oecus setara eee eee 111 Maintenance Free Battery 04 359 Maintenance General llle 352 Maintenance Procedures 000 352 Maintenance Schedule 004 400 NENNEN INDEX 427 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 181 350 Manual Service llle 414 Manual Transaxle 0 0 239 242 374 Downshifting s4 6 05 eda dee taba 243 Fluid Level Check 005 374 375 Frequency of Fluid Change 375 376 Lubricant Selection less 374 375 Map Reading Lights 004 120 Master Cylinder Brakes 004 372 Mirrors 2d ee e GA Rd Sia Sew ig ELAS 78 Electric Powered llle 80 Exterior Folding e eteted mio es 80 Outside iussa sed ex bana b YE ea Ek ee 79 Rearview seare gia catau a E 3e mer 3C ER 78 Vanity sery wiblbydeeRehbrISe9 Rx ga RE 82 Modifications Alterat
19. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefor DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2007 Chrysler LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION 45 6 eno ot tee 9 28 80 ee ia 6 8 9 woes ie
20. Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owner s Manual The UConnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect system pairing instructions Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 with 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect system The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and pr
21. WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Locking Doors With The Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key rearward To unlock the door turn the key forward Refer to Body Lubrication under Main tenance Procedures in Section 7 Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE With the driver s door open and the key in the ignition both the power door locks and Remote Keyless Entry RKE will not function ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle
22. tion and the current fuel tank level Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Refer to Section 5 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS for system operation Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK automatic transmission or the vehicle is stopped manual transmissions Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Set tings is displayed in the EVIC 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Use the EVIC button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais depend ing on availability As you continue the displayed infor mation will be shown in the selected language NOTE UConnect language will not change using the EVIC Please refer to Language Selection in the Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped section of this manual for details Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 24 k
23. 9 8 9 ee ROS EEE noQ US e wee Boe eee ae 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ecelesie n n 8 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee hh hh nn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eese eee hh nn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc cece eee ren ikinin hh e hn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee hh hh han 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 cc ccc cece c ccc c ccc c eer c cece hh mnn 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES seees eotecsseevvscesicessieececeviseeciceceice 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2 cece cece ssr Esras SSE SEEKS SERRES EES 10 INDEX qM INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction ssee nn 4 Warnings And Cautions lesse 7 I Rollover Warming casae ku veseese sa ERG 4 W Vehicle Identification Number 7 Bl How To Use This Manual 5 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in
24. High Beam occse see en 124 173 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 124 PASSING 54403 dos eae RO RT PAR RU ede a RR 125 Replacing sud euer s rd PPS TRUE 386 SWIECIE 23 euo Barat eet dU PRU es 121 Heated Seats lille 114 Hill Descent Control sses eredes es mresta 137 181 Hitches Trailer TOWING cie mre 320 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 142 Hood Release es 118 HOSES 4 ooo aee dae a E ia a Ro aes Bee d 370 leHiON coke oss eb ebbe aisle ba oe 12 TII 12 Ignition Key Removal sesss 12 Immobilizer Sentry Key sss 15 19 Infant Restraint llle 61 Information Center Vehicle 05 183 Inside Rearview Mirror 000000 78 nn INDEX 425 Instrument Cluster 0 0 0 nesia 172 Instrument Panel and Controls 170 Instrument Panel Cover 00040 380 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 381 Integrated Power Module Fuses 382 Interior Appearance Care 04 379 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 128 Introduction iiie bees 4 Jack Location lt 544 40 re y RR Y s 334 Jack Operation ie sees me RU done aE 334 336 Jacking Instructions 336 Jump Starting 252 fv sedis c exe E 340 Key Programming 0 0 0 eee estas 17 Key Replacement ena a cee eee 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer 00 15 Key In Reminder sossen ria ana
25. Satellite Radio 4 race as hare eae ees 217 220 Satellite Radio Antenna 00085 223 Schedule Maintenance 00005 400 Seat Belt Maintenance 0 0 000s 381 Seat Belt Reminder sess 46 Seat Belts 1 siue edo baths keh nied dead Rn 35 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 41 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 41 And Pregnant Women eeaeee su r aune 48 Child Restraint 0 0 0 0 00 0 eee eae 60 Ext nder 4 24 2 9 63 dacg kh R4 PEORES 47 Front Seat 2 202 4040 0 0340080540000 dS 36 PretenslOners spus Ceresa Wo ea owe a Pee RS 45 Rear Seat ieu ha sura ea a UXOR OO EE ars 36 Reminder sad EE RARE EGGS 174 Seats sieer adasa pom RR VG BE CRGO aa ed 109 Adjustment lllleeeeeee 109 Cleaning sso cbse etka ee PEG e des 378 Head Restraints 00 000 cece aes 113 OAC ie os stra APP Eae Sees eS 114 Lumbar Support 00000005 111 Rear Folding 24 00 4c Rab atesi ns 116 Rear Folding Sedan 116 Seatback Release llle 112 MAING oa dui leh atte ate arg alea a tases dha 112 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Selection of Oil llle 354 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 19 Sentry Key Programming sess 17 Sentry Key Replacement 0 16 Service Assistance lees 409 Service Contract uerus X ae ee as 411 Service Manuals leen 414 NENN
26. Say 4 digit System Lists override pin code Phones Select phone ane phone to be deleted ISNA OSS P i Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists phone Deleted confirms Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e4 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes redial previous record again es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
27. malfunction is caused by an internal leak as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops the brake warning indicator will light WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop 280 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS
28. mark turn the engine off immediately and call for service There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioning is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to Floor and the Fan control to High This allows the heater core to act asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 18 Cruise Indicator Light If Equipped CRUISE This indicator shows that the Speed Control System is ON 19 Cruise SET Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator shows that the Speed Control System is SET 20 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection 21 OdometerlTrip Odometer Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 mi 0 km The odometer must be in Trip mode to reset 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle pl
29. plate into the buckle until you hear a click pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding i under the belt in a collision Connecting Mini Latch To Buckle 7 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up 8 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 9 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle Detaching Mini Latch and Buckle 10 To disengage the mini latch from the mini buckle for storage insert the regular latch plate into the black button on the top of the mini buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully Insert the mini latch plate into the slot provided in the trim panel Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to automatically remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision These devices improve the perfor mance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute
30. 120 Front Seat Adjustment 109 Map Reading Lights 120 Manual Seat Height Adjustment Multifunction Control Lever i e 121 lt Bquipped vsueceicek kr gels renar 110 Headlights Parking Lights Instrument Panel Manual Lumbar If Equipped 111 Lighis gisan acy uis tis ved os EU etches s 121 Driver s Seatback Redline 112 Daytime Running Lights DRL Adjustable Head Restraints 113 TEERUIDDEG ones skate ovo ee tmp es ee Heated Seats If Equipped 0 114 Lights On Reminder 122 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat 115 Hog x Pee aah aes ears 123 Folding Rear Seat isses 116 TSIEN Lae Get Pees ge dott 123 Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped 117 Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch 124 MI To Open And Close The Hood 000 118 Passing Light o se the reb RUE 125 Off Road Lights If Equipped 125 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 E Windshield Wipers And Washers 127 To Accelerate For Passing 133 Windshield Wiper Operation 127 W Anti Lock Brake System ABS Intermittent Wiper System Ls 128 E iis Windshield Washers esses eee Mist Feature iiis 129 oie Maree eee B
31. AUX jack using a standard 3 5 mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases the MODE button until AUX appears on the display NOTE The radio will return to the last stored mode if the ignition switch is turned from the OFF LOCK posi tion to the ACC position the radio is turned on and the radio was previously in the AUX mode SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MUTE Button Auxiliary Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning off the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function PSCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function RND SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Mode Button Auxiliary Mode Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio if equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to the Hands Free Phone UConnect section of this Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to
32. CD player Satellite Radio or Video Entertainment Sys tem VES if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time MSG or INFO Button Radio Mode Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only TIME Button Press the TIME
33. CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise position Press the 4 Set the temperature VERY HOT button Set the Mode control at or between and 4 control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the Ic button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort a Press the If it s sunny set it s cloudy COOL OR COLD Press the HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set conditioning on e 64 6 64656 T ie the air con En and COLD DRY Press the CONDITIONS Set the Mode control at ot near _ J CS KS button to turn recirculate off the Mode control at or near or dark set the Mode control at or near button to turn recirculate off the Mode control at or between and turn the air conditioning on If and f then turn the air If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near v and turn ditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between Sp button to turn recirculate off If itis sunny you may want more upper
34. Hands Free Phone And Video Entertainment System VES Capabilities sesi i oem eek rr EE 203 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 203 Operating Instructions CD Mode For CD Audio Play s se 93 be REESE 209 Load Eject Button CD Mode For CD Audio Play 0 0 0 0 2 eee eee eee 210 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 212 Operating Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play ete eder eor bain ESE 214 Load Eject Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 214 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 Sales Code REC AM FM CD 6 Disc Radio With Navigation System 217 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped 5 217 REC Setting The Clock 0 218 H Satellite Radio If Equipped 220 System Activation 00000 220 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID lesse ees 221 Selecting Satellite Mode In REF RAQ And RAK Radios sente seran akee ab aan a Be nes 222 selecting A Channel 0543 02Gode 4 0944 4 222 Storing And Selecting Preset Channels Using The PTY Program Type Button If Equipped iui vestre hen ER bes 223 PTY Button Scan sek mk RR 223 PTY Button Seek llle 223 Satellite Antenna 000 00008 223 Reception Quality i e obe ER re 224 ll Remote Sound System Controls
35. Help Command used For example instead of saying Setup and then If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to Phone Pairing the following compound command know your options at any prompt say Help following can be said Setup Phone Pairing the beep The UConnect system will play all the options e For each feature explanation in this section only the At any prompt iE yom dS JOE help combined form of the voice command is given You To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press can also break the commands into parts and say each the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for part of the command when you are asked for it For directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a example you can use the combined form voice com press of the PHONE button on the radio control head mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone
36. J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent Power Steering Reservoir Mopar Power Steering Fluid 4 or Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmis sion Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emissions Control System Maintenance 400 Required Maintenance Intervals E Maintenance Schedule 0 400 COMmreomMm zon mo2Zzr2zamazZz reZz M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 400 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the Emissions Con trol System These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE T
37. LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Front Header Lamp 2050 T578 Center Dome Lamp 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 eee T578 Rear Cargo Flashlight 8 A35LF 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHTS BULBS Exterior Bulb No Low Beam High Beam Headlight H13 Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker Light 3157AK or 3157A Front Fog Light 000 0 9145 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL LED Assembly Rear Tail Stopi e erae eie nm e 3157 Rear Turn Signal 3757AK or 3757A Backup Light W16W 921 License Light i45 io rk t eR ead wa W5W Off Road Lights i us cus ees H3 BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamps 1 Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the headlight Headlight Connector ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 2 Reach into engine compartment and pull red lock out 3 Remove the green connector from the back of the bulb at connector by pulling straight back drum Releasing Red Lock Tab Releasing Connector 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE 4 Twist the bulb to the left and pull outward from assembly 81911575 Removing Halogen Bulb From Assembly SEES SERES NOTE These are halogen bulbs Take care not to touch Twisting Bulb From Socket the bulb with your fingers Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb life EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
38. Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 WARNING WARNING DO NOT use a tire wheel size or rating other than e NEVER use a tire with a smaller load index or that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of capacity other than what was originally equipped unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load dimensions and performance characteristics result index could result in tire overloading and failure ing in changes to steering handling and braking of You could lose control and have an accident your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire You could lose control and have an accident resulting failure and loss of vehicle control in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may resu
39. Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reason s for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected before rotating The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the diagram below TIRE ROTATION PATTERN FRONT OF VEHICLE E E m iti E MM Ed 4 TIRE ROTATION 80ba79fe TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED e The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pres sure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mi 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure fa
40. RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration SEATS Front Seat Adjustment The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats near the floor Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired position Front Seat Adjustment Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped 1 WARNING The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using the ratcheting handle on the outboard side of the seat to e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is ae os adjust the driving position dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Seat Height Adjustment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Manual Lumbar If Equipped The Lumbar adjustment is located on the outboard
41. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has side curtain airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Side Remote Acceleration Sensors if equipped Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above side win dows if equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Seat Belt Reminder Light Knee Impact Bolsters e Front Acceleration Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners How The Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction
42. Tilt Steering Column 00 130 Biase AGSGUSySIEnt END Set jaeee thee ess s H Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 130 IRCHODLSORUQUSSIEHLUISSU Eagaftiitveiepat ui ae To Cr CNN 131 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 136 To Set At A Desired Speed 000000 131 HEB Descent ons DG DCEQUIBDEO sei Yo Deactivate ue ce set open qe nega 132 RISTO RUE Eg EIDE sae id To Resume Speed 000000 132 om arabe Doce pene Di pR sie esti To Vary The Speed Setting 0 0000 132 c M tate io Manual Transaxle esses 132 Cate Operator Canadian Programing sssi d 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Using HomeLink 000 147 Wind B ffeting ss a4 2 RE EN ev 152 Reprogramming A Single Sunroof Maintenance 05 152 HOOT BUON ra ec tame s rwa wie gd ee Ignition Off Operation 152 ii Peake eee ae Re eas ll Electrical Power Outlets If Equipped 152 Lr I E Pe Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 154 CEDSISSELOHHAUOUE 49 Pipe gend dag d Bl Console Features 00 000 e eee 155 misc M E 19 o Cargo Area Features 0 000 000 000 156 Opening The Sunroof 150 Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging Closing The Sunroof i4 rk n s 150 Flashlight If Equipped
43. Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed CAUTION container to avoid contamination from foreign matter NOTE Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall nate the brake fluid as seal damage will result clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of Automatic Transaxle CVT clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid which has been formulated with special metal to metal friction coefficient additives to provide the proper 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid will cause belt slip and result in a complete transmission failure Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked only by a trained technician Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for the correct change interval Special Additives Do not add any materials other than leak detection dy
44. VEHICLE EBENEN As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions The second row center lap shoulder belt features a three point seat belt with a mini latch and buckle which allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded The mini buckle and shoulder belt can then be stored out of the way in the right side trim panel for added convenience 1 Remove the mini atch and regular latch from its stowed position in the right rear side trim panel ne Mini Latch Stowage 2 Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the belt over the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 3 Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head restraint Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt 4 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the mini latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a click 5 Sit back in the seat Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 6 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight
45. a safe recovery First connect the tow strap to the correct attachment points on both vehicles There should be a least 20 to 30 ft 6 to 9 m between the vehicles to allow for a safe recovery If necessary join two tow straps together using a 1 1 2 in 4 cm hard wood dowel This will keep the straps from becoming knotted and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap breaks Next have the tow vehicle backup leaving 2 to 3 ft 61 to 91 cm worth of slack in the strap Then the tow vehicle using light throttle should accelerate tightening the strap provid ing the pulling force needed to free the vehicle The vehicle being recovered should assist in the recovery at the time of the snap by slowly spinning the tires in the same direction as the pulling vehicle After the vehicle becomes free the driver of the previously stuck vehicle should signal they are free and should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles The driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the throttle without using the brakes once signaled by the other driver This sequence is important to avoid having the recovered vehicle hit the pulling vehicle 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two straps with a clevis pin These heavy metal objects could become projectiles if a strap breaks which could cause severe injury Never leave more than 2 to 3 ft 61 to 91 cm of slack in the strap More slack than this greatl
46. are recommended 7 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Drive Belt Check Condition Check the drive belt condition Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual Inspect the drive belt for evidence of cuts cracks or glazing and replace the belt for any sign of damage which could result in belt failure The belt is self tensioning and will not need adjustment Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New spark plugs should be installed at the specified mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 8 for spark plug information Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued o
47. at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible 31 4WD Warning Light This light monitors the 4 Wheel Drive 4WD system The light will come on for a bulb check when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as three seconds 4WD When lit solid There is an 4WD system fault 4WD performance will be at a reduced level Service the 4WD system soon When blinking The 4WD system is temporarily dis abled due to overload condition 32 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages 33 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Button If Equipped Pushing this button will change the display to the choices available for EVIC UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER e Vehicle information warning message displays EVIC IF EQUIPPED e Personal settings customer programmable features e Compass heading e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions E e UConnect hands free communication system dis plays if equipped we e Audio mode display e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 5975 When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays EVIC Location the following messages The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive d
48. be used at any time 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming Homelink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 General Information This device complies with FC
49. before returning to the set position Rear Wiper Washer Control If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to Park ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer if equipped is shared It is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol vent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Rear Window Defroster The pushbutton is located on the bottom right side of the blower control knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster An amber light shows that the defroster is on x 819179d2 The defroster will automatically turn off after approxi mately ten minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button again To prevent excessive battery drain use the defroster only when the engine is operating Rear Wiper Heater Grid 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Use care when washing the inside of the rear wind
50. by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have been deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING e Flashes hazard lights e Turns on the interior lights which remain on as long as Deployed airbags can t protect you in another colli the battery has power or until the ignition key is sion Have the airbags replaced by an authorized removed dealer as soon as possible e Unlocks the doors automatically Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment with the vehicle stopped and the vehicle communication network intact and the power intact the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following func tions e Cuts off fuel to the engine ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Maintaining Your Airbag System Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection
51. can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electron ics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related transponder fault unless the
52. cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill 1 Refer to Maintenance Schedule under Section 8 CAUTION If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount e Mixing of coolants other than specified Hybrid of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove coolants may result in engine damage and may all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT antifreeze solution coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the speci Selection Of Coolant fied coolant as soon as possible Refer to Fluids Lubricants and
53. covered when operating your vehicle on public streets highways roads etc Further illumi nating these lights with supplied covers installed could cause permanent damage to the lights or cov ers Before using these auxiliary Off Road lights contact your State Authorities for proper operation and use of these lights 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The auxiliary Off Road lights can only be acti vated when the high beam headlights are on Press the top of the switch to turn on the auxiliary Off Road lights when off road conditions require addi tional lighting Press the bottom of the switch to turn off the auxiliary Off Road lights Off Road Light Switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS X The wipers and washers are operated by a switch S on the control lever The lever is located on the right side of the steering column Windshield Wiper Operation Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed 81918d49 Wiper Control 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever Rotate the knob upward clockwise to decrease the delay time and downward counterclockwise to increase the delay time The delay can be regulate
54. cross than proceed using the low and slow method CAUTION Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator e Crossing Ditches Streams Shallow Rivers Or Other Flowing Water Flowing water can be extremely dangerous Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control Even in very shallow water a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle s running ground clearance You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle s running ground clearance Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle downstream out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle s body Before you proceed determine the speed of the current the water s depth approach angle bottom condition 270 STARTING AND OPERATING EE and if there are any obstacles then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique WARNING Never drive through fast moving deep water It can push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning A
55. cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the LED is not lit during starting have it checked If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on
56. dink Binns 335 Spinning ae caw E Re e AER Litvak tee wes 297 Tread Wear Indicators 000 297 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 322 TOWING dace eau ee oes pae oe a Ec dea 317 24 Hour Towing Assistance 04 95 Disabled Vehicle 0 0 0 0 eee 343 en INDEX 433 Guid esee domua A 321 Recreational lees 329 Weight ssc sates edebe 9 ex es heres dena 321 Towing Assistance lt eus e s 95 TEactOn iuc rires esee adea uu obs s 276 Trailer TOWING cue eer Rr Red t RR 317 Cooling System Tips 000 328 Hitches a3 re toe Pet d edu od es 320 Minimum Requirements 05 323 Trailer and Tongue Weight 322 Witt is aca ae eae cac deg EUR ae daas 326 Trailer Towing Guide 005 321 Trailer Weight sk Rr RR RR 321 Transaxle ose anc RD ER a EA EE 244 Automatic llle 13 239 244 373 Autos ck erra goa edhe ed ey RARE ad 249 Manual sis cuiaaeuiea caw ROSA 12 239 242 Operation ipei ig hae doe Bae bak RR 244 Overdrive ese cad hoe vac EUR R3 Hla E 248 Selection of Lubricant 0 373 Transmission Range Indicator 0 0 000055 177 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 000 24 Transmitter Garage Door Opener Hom Link8 ss s42 654 ERR wale ERE 142 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 000 22 Transporting Pets 22000 birsceses e tenete tsi 68 Tread Wea
57. downshift by one ratio Autostick is deactivated e By holding the shift lever to momentarily e When the shift lever is shifted out of DRIVE e When in 6th position touching the shift lever to the right e When heavy Anti Lock Brake System ABS applica tion is detected Autostick General Information e If a ratio other than 1st is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transaxle control logic will automatically select the 1st gear ratio e Ifa low range is selected and the engine accelerates to the rev limit the transaxle will automatically select the next higher ratio If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine However the CVT will stay in the manually selected ratio e If the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off If the system detects a problem it will disable the Autostick mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected en STARTING AND OPERATING 251 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if addi EQUIPPED tional traction is needed in sand deep snow or loose This feature provides full time on demand 4 Wheel traction surfaces activate the 4WD Lock switch by pull Drive AWD ing up once and releasing This locks the center coupling a
58. eaea EE A 14 Keyless Entry System Sedan 19 KEYS PP HC ale ee Wii e E EE S 12 Knee Bolster llle 48 Lane Change and Turn Signals 173 389 Lap Shoulder Belts 00000 36 Latches THOOG PEN 118 Lead Free Gasoline llle 311 Life of lies ke RERO RR 298 Liftgate Sedan 4 4 eer I I e 9 EH 33 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 162 Light Bulbs iioi IR RR 385 Lights occcndigeverdas Rt eIeRRR eed a 71 120 Airbag ue e 3 Edi RAE 53 57 70 173 Back Up cc ccd a seed ac eee bra a eee 389 Brake Warning 2 0 02 175 Bulb Replacement sses ceo cte eisrean 386 Cargo ates Ee sg eed d CH Ra ques 156 Center Mounted Stop 426 INDEX EE Daytime Running scs deier ee aea a 122 Dimmer Switch Headlight 121 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator sec 046 64 e Le Ree ees 139 142 Engine Temperature Warning 175 POS ciu be Y o ewe d eR Reges 123 181 389 Headlight Switch nis crecian inust en 121 Headlights coterie e be e ER eritem 121 High Beam Indicator 0 4 173 Instrument Cluster secesio es c Ree 121 License u a d eg ape e VOR ea drea 391 Lights On Reminder lius 122 Low Fuel cc ie n en 173 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 181 Map Reading 0 0 0 0 ce eee eae 120 Off Road ii ek pee Ret o meer iE 125 Oil Pressure cssc ber E ken 173 Seat Belt Reminder 04 174
59. entrance ramp angle of 1 3 degrees 258 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN 1 3 ENTRANCE RAMP ANGLE 81a621ad Water Fording Characteristics ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 The Basics of Off Road Driving You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Control ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what isn t When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME When To Use Low L Off Road wi
60. for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat ing LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out board positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child re straints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the Child Restraint System for typical installa tion instructions Rear Seat LATCH 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older pro
61. gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth while still applying throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momentum en STARTING AND OPERATING 261 CAUTION e Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPM s or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause skidding and loss of control e Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and maintain your momentum If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good practice before entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoid ing abrupt man
62. has been cut away to expose the jacking locations in the body Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and bolt on center cap if equipped off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 8 Finish tightening the nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until each nu
63. home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect
64. in an impact While N the airbag system is designed to be mainte e Modifications to any part of the airbag system nance free if any of the following occurs have could cause it to fail when you need it You could an authorized dealer service the system promptly be injured because the airbags are not there to M protect you Do not modify the components or e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers wiring including adding any kind of badges or during the six to eight seconds when the ignition stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the switch is first turned on upper passenger side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body struc ture or frame e The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight second interval You need proper knee impact protection in a e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket driving equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quart
65. is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object CAUTION Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If everything looks good and you feel confident then you should use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and proceed with caution maintaining your momen tum as you climb the hill Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropri ate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start
66. low ratio is ideal for crawling over obstacles 4WD Lock Mode 4 wheel drive lock mode com mands a higher torque to the rear wheels for im proved traction capability off road It also turns on other system features in conjunction with Low Off Road mode ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 e Unique Engine Calibration When the system has the 4WD lock lever engaged and is in the Low Off Road mode or reverse the engine calibration changes to run higher spark advance with premium fuel for optimum off road performance Your vehicle is equipped with an active spark knock system and can adjust the engine calibration for a varying range of fuel octane levels High Mobility Characteristics The Freedom Drive II Off Road package has high off road mobility characteristics with an approach angle A 29 degrees a break over angle B 23 degrees a running ground clearance C 9 in 23 cm a departure angle D 33 degrees and a turning circle of 35 6 ft 11 m 256 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 81a5c17d Angles ABCD ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 Water Fording Characteristics Water fording characteristic is the vehicle s ability to cross a body of still water where the powertrain and drivetrain are safe from water ingestion The Freedom Drive II Off Road package has high water fording char acteristics with the ability to cross a pool of water without stopping 19 in 48 cm deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph 8 km h with an
67. main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that coolant will return to the radiator from W the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scald ing or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to rem
68. minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio A digital readout shows the frequency and or time in hours and minutes depending on your radio model whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position When the ignition switch is in the OFF position or when the radio frequency is being displayed timekeeping is accurately maintained On the AM FM CD 6 disc radio the time button alternates the location of the time and frequency on the display On the AM FM CD single disc radio only one of the two time or frequency is displayed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE AUDIO con trol knob 3 After the hours are adjusted push the TUNE AUDIO control knob to set the minutes 4 Adjust the minutes by turning the TUNE AUDIO control knob 5 To exit press any button knob or wait approximately five seconds SALES CODE REF AM FM CD SINGLE DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate 4 SEEK p gt aa RW FF 0 VOL Cr
69. of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg es STARTING AND OPERATING 289 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and c
70. or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation The sunroof will also operate up to 45 seconds after the ignition has been turned off The sunroof operation will be canceled if either of the front doors are opened during the 45 second time period ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS IF EQUIPPED There is a standard 12 Volt power outlet in the instrument panel and a 115 Volt 150 Watts Maximum power outlet in the center console on certain models for added conve nience These outlets can power cell phones electronics and other low power devices NOTE Due to overload protection the inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 WARNING To Avoid Serious Injury or Death Do not use a Three Prong Adapter Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure Power Outlet 12 Volts 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery l
71. or six in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica tors the temporary use spare tire needs to be Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in replaced the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare Compact Spare Tire If Equipped tire failure and loss of vehicle control The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style 2906 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN DO NOT install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare DO NOT install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance DO NOT take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equ
72. phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dial ing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 fro
73. placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Fold Down Speakers If Equipped When the liftgate is open the speakers can swing down from the trim panel to face rearward for tailgating and other activities a2c801 E Fold Down Speakers NOTE Do not close the liftgate with the fold down speakers opened The speakers could be damaged if they come into contact with luggage stored in the cargo area 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer A switch on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch forward to the ON position will activate the wiper The rear wiper operates in an inter mittent mode only Rotating the center of the switch all the way forward will turn on the wash function The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button is pressed Upon release the wipers will cycle two times
74. provided by the ORC This ORC will detect rollover The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee impact bolster the instrument panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 e The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for six to eight N seconds as a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the infla
75. range markings will consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding 1 qt 1L of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine as indicated by the range markings as described above on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for recommended engine oil change intervals Engine Oil Selection Gasoline Engines For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also states th
76. release the EVIC button to display one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing the outside temperature and the current radio station For additional information regarding the compass refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in this Section Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel reading before the reset ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level This is not resettable NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 mi 48 3 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will be dis played based on the current values in the DTE calcula
77. responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light 304 STARTING AND OPERATING EE e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System If Equipped X This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Light
78. side of the driver s seat To increase or decrease support rotate the handle up or down Lumbar Adjustment 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Driver s Seatback Recline To recline 1 Lean forward before lifting the handle then lean back to the desired position and release the handle 2 Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright position Reclining Seat ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Adjustable Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Pull up or push down on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical To raise the head restraint pull up on the head restraint To lower the head restraint depress the button and push down on the head restraint Head Restraint Adjustment 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Heated Seats If Equipped WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat This feature heats the front driver s and passenger s seats
79. sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received 81826bd7 Check TPM System Display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will not be present and a pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cy
80. stable steering col Push the lever back up to lock the column firmly in place umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have C an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over accelerator opera tion at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The speed control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel Tilting Steering Column Control es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 81812005 Speed Control Location To Activate Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off The system should be turned OFF when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To De
81. sun 127 128 Windshield Wipers 000005 127 363 Wiper Blade Replacement 364 Wipers Intermittent siess naa saiia a inaa 128 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 378 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communicatio
82. surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and proceed e Driving Across An Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the down hill wheels which increases the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down EN STARTING AND OPERATING 267 WARNING Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury e If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift to RE VERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing engine and hill descent braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result i
83. system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in th
84. the Cargo Cover Extended spring tension to the left 2 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 3 Remove right side from cargo area Removable Load Floor 4 Remove assembly from the vehicle The cargo area load floor is removable and can be i washed with mild soap and water For removal lift the load floor with your finger at the space provided at the rear Cargo Cover Removal Removable Load Floor 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Cargo Tie Down Loops There are four D rings tie down loops in the lower trim for securing cargo The tie downs located on the cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when vehicle is moving WARNING e Cargo tie down Loops are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly
85. the Satellite Radio section of this Owner s Manual SALES CODE RAQ AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO HANDS FREE PHONE AND VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES CAPABILITIES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 i44 SEEK gt gt 4 RW FF 6 DISC MP3 4 3 81365bb1 RAO Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON Mode Button Radio Mode Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
86. the Security Alarm will automatically disarm After 16 seconds the Security Alarm indicator light will flash slowly This shows that the Security Alarm System is fully armed E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Disarm The Security Alarm System 1 Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter LOCK 2 Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry Key will disarm the Security Alarm A valid key is one that is programmed to your vehicle A valid key will disarm the Security Alarm System an invalid key will allow the engine to run for two seconds and stop Security Alarm System Manual Override The Security Alarm System will not arm if you lock the UNLOCK doors using the manual door lock plunger 8132a7a6 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED Three bation REE Dancer This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances up to with metal objects 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors and liftgate When the UNLOCK button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking light
87. the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check the area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or fuel power steering fluid transmission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS g B Mirrors 0 eee 78 WiHands Free Communication UConnect Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped 78 It Equipped s sese eot deta eee RE eir bowed 82 Outside Mirror Driver s Side 79 Opera ON ssena cups wha ds esi edd dad 84 Outside Mirror Passenger s Side 79 Phone Call Features aeaa 91 Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped 80 UConnect System Features 94 Power Remote Control Mirrors Advanced Phone Connectivity 98 It Equipped 22 edu ee inpia aene d 80 Things You Should Know About Your Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 82 UConnect System cpi cas e neamika ies 100 Sun Visor Sliding Feature esses 82 General Information nsaan anaana 109 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se i PEPPER 109 IDs oce oio 53E ei oer EN CERA
88. the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook in this section The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language Phonebook Download UConnect allows the user to download entries from their pho
89. the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder Belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats an
90. the vehicle and shut OFF the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine This can be determined using the procedure shown in Section 7 5 Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level drops to two gallons the fuel symbol will light and a single chime will sound 6 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 7 Airbag Warning Light The light comes on and remains on for six to 9 eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light does not come on during starting stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer 8 Turn Signal Indicator Light The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turn signal when using the turn signal lever 9 High Beam Indicator Light E This light shows that the headlights are on high beam Push the turn signal lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 10 Anti Lock Brake Warning Light If Equipped This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System fes ABS described elsewhere in this manual This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service
91. the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully A WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up See Owner s Manual For Further Information 80bfe0fO0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat INTRODUCTION 5 belts could cut the
92. to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 15 Transmission Temperature Warning Light During sustained high speed driving on hot days the automatic transaxle oil may become too hot If this happens the transmission over heat indicator light will come on and the vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transaxle cools down enough to allow a return to the requested speed If the high speed is maintained the overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion 16 Security Alarm System Indicator Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the alarm system is arming The light will begin to flash slowly indicating that the system is armed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 17 Temperature Gauge If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red
93. to damage the elastomer seal during removal 7 Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 81182072 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together NOTE If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se DOOR LOCKS WARNING Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from For personal security and safety in the event of an inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well is closed the door will lock Make sure the keys are not as when you park and leave the vehicle inside the vehicle before closing the door WARNING When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju ries and death Manual Door Lock Plunger ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended P
94. to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owne
95. up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth This will provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes 266 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING with caution Allow engine and hill descent braking to E control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured e Driving Down Hill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the
96. use a combination of the mode control fan speed control and tempera 81caad38 ture control to achieve your de sired interior temperature NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 MAX A C For maximum cooling select the air direction to either the Panel or Bi Level position using the mode control Press the A C button and the recirculation button so that both lamps are illuminated and A set the temperature control to its 81cab384 coolest setting NOTE e Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes e See Circulation Control in this section for proper or extended use of this position Air Filtration System If Equipped An air filter is included in the optional Security Group Filter media includes a particle filtration layer and a charcoal layer The filter will reduce but not eliminate diesel and agricultural smells The filter acts only on air coming from outside the vehicle it does not filter air inside the passenger compartment See the maintenance schedule for the filter change interval The air filter change interval coincides with engine oil and filter change intervals As with oil changes the interval is shorter for heavy duty service or dusty conditions See your authorized dealer for service 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operating Tips WEATHER
97. vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop NOTE During cold weather until the transaxle lubri cant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in the following table Manual Transaxle Recommended Shift Speeds Units in mph km h Engine Arrel Size eration 1t02 2to3 3to4 4to5 Rate All En Accel 14 23 23 37 29 47 45 72 gines Cruise 12 19 18 29 25 40 32 52 Downshifting Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life 244 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN CAUTION AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or downshift at too high a vehicle speed you could damage the engine transmission or clutch To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift down to 2nd or 1st gear when descending a steep grade When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur dened Automatic Shift Lever ee STARTING AND OPERATING 245 NOTE You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down CAU TIONI while shifting out of PARK D to t
98. 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 Radial Ply Tires vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein WARNING stalled at the first opportunity WARNING e Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires DO NOT drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four
99. 81caad41 NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance indicates warmer temperatures mm 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Circulation Control Use this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A lamp will illuminate when you are in recirculate mode Only use the recirculate mode to tempo t rarily block out any outside odors 81022332 smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE Continuous use of the recirculate mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculate position will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position NOTE Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes Air Conditioning Normal Use this button to engage the Air Conditioning A lamp will illumi nate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged Once the air conditioning is engaged
100. A A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance 416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 418 INDEX EE
101. ABS Anti Lock Brake System 279 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 367 Adding Fuel 222 BR RR RR ER 314 Adding Washer Fluid 06 163 Additives Fuel Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 358 Air Conditioner Maintenance 361 Air Conditioning Controls 227 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 232 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 361 362 Air Conditioning System 227 361 Air Pressure Tires 0 0 0 0 00 eee eens 292 AUD AS ascia Vinea unc d audtaegtea a 2d ase 48 Airbag Deployment 0040 53 55 Airbag Light 22 403 4405 dened eee en 53 57 70 173 Airbag Maintenance 0 0 00 dounen 57 Airbag Sid i a ees 54 Airbag Window Side Curtain 49 54 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 176 Alignment and Balance 005 300 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio less 223 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 366 395 396 Capacities cesarica samas Ha eek a nesia 395 Disposal ecse 449 cae hes be e a kapan 368 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 133 279 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Appearance Cate sacs ace e Re es KR RR 376 Assistance TOWING ase s dreneres x eR ey a eyes 95 Automatic Door Locks llus 27 29 Automatic Transaxle 13 239 244 333 373 Fluid Level
102. AS Warning Light and ESP Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light and the yellow ESP Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURE
103. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos a sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Positioning Lap Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push the anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that fits you best Adjustable Anchorage 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR
104. C rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located in the reading light 815d5564 Power Sunroof Switch 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof o
105. Center High Mounted Stoplight ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 Auxiliary Off Road Light 393 Enginen ana Sue fepe Fa Ha RUE as es 396 a Fluids And Capacities ecsscsrsrk ner ER 395 MAGS oa Soi p C RO eA ERR Y RE ca AUR end 397 Bi Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 396 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE ENGINE COMPARTMENT GASOLINE WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID POWER STEERING ENGINE OIL RESERVOIR FILL BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR FUSES INTEGRATED POWER MODULE COOLANT BOTTLE ENGINE OIL RADIATOR DIPSTICK CAP AIR CLEANER FILTER BATTERY 818fccef ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transaxle control systems When these systems are oper ating properly your vehicle will provide excellent per formance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repai
106. Check 0 0 00 00000 374 Interlock System 0 0 0 eee eee 246 Overheating ugs e ce Wa he eM So es 333 Selection Of Lubricant 004 373 SHUDE sse dk cube cade re odo as 246 Special Additives 000000 374 Autostick gc He eed ad Ad las GAS EE 249 en INDEX 419 Ball JOINTS 2 22 dn aba ee xa RR 362 Battery iso dese oak Rae Poe ogee E Ego Racks 359 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Belts Drive serrare re qoo ee GA PR Fae OS 356 Body Mechanism Lubrication 363 B Pillar Location weese key Bae ee Paes 287 Brake Assist System 0 000000 e eee 135 Brake Fluid 25318249 T be ub tit bd es 397 Brake Parking i sese ge ane ERE Reds 276 Brake System assoesce kart cde d be EP a 278 371 Anti Lock ABS 4 133 134 279 LHOSeS paate te oe Seed ae PS ae eae x 371 Master Cylinder 02000040 372 Parking 25 29 iim REESE UE 276 Warning Light 000000 175 Brakes sangane obo ewe blades eater ehe 278 371 Brake Transmission Interlock 246 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 69 Bulb Replacement 000 385 386 Bulbs Light oc eee ee ae eee eR 385 Calibration Compass 0000006 192 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 395 Capacities Fluid isses ema ae RR 395 Caps Filler PUG P 314 Oil Engine seice p breeds dee Phe wes 348 354 Car Washes es c ature iue t
107. E Se e Cruise control status WARNING e Traction stability control status In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force e Tire pressure monitoring system status Child Restraint required to hold even an infant on your lap could Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all become so great that you could not hold the child no times babies and children too Every state in the matter how strong you are The child and others United States and all Canadian provinces require that could be badly injured Any child riding in your small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it size Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Infants And Small Children There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are a
108. E aia Wer KR Re 377 Carbon Monoxide Warning 314 Cargo Area COVER is sek ue er d 158 Cargo Area Features 0 000000 00 156 Cargo Compartment ra LET 156 Luggage Carner oriec eee ee eee 164 Cargo Lights s od emu ve Gade sque oe eo pec ates 156 Cargo Load Floor 2 0 pe e eee eee 159 Cargo Tie DOWNS ete sce e chr RE W3OOP Aes 160 Catalytic Converter 420 INDEX EE Caution Exhaust Gas 0 0 000000 eee 69 CD Compact Disc Player 195 203 CD Compact Disc Player Maintenance 226 Cellular Phone 0 0 00 cee eee eee 82 226 Center High Mounted Stop Light 392 Chains Tire 52 ce uo d erae Raed Boe ee 300 Changing A Flat Tire isses ed RR RR 334 Chart lire SiZing resis eee dade dee RR 284 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 350 Child Restraint 2 20 0 0 rsa tiori ee ee 60 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 64 Child Restraint with Automatic Belts 63 Child Safety Locks 45 30 Child Se t es wage Rer DR a ha pea ik 66 Clean Air Gasoline 0 0 00 eee 311 Cleaning Wheels uuu pt eda awe we ae a 378 Climate Control 0 0 0 0 00 cee eee 227 CICE sic ese a Sce PE ieee he 194 197 205 218 Clutch iie UR eR RAS ns ne eg de heady 372 Clutch Fluid edad ae ed hae Re thaws 372 Coin Holder 6 2 6 eecte bebe eee ees 155 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 226 Compact Spare D
109. EN INDEX 431 Setting the Clock eroas sanser iia 195 197 205 218 Settings Personal 0 0 0 0 eee erias 187 Shift Speeds Manual Transaxle 243 Shoulder Belts rereset terie 249 ane ed deed nes 36 Side Amis oie wd gine ee are Res OA a 54 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 234 Signals Tutt seu eo Sa eee Re Ee s 389 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 275 Snow Chains Tire Chains 300 Snow Tires iier e RES AG eA wa dS Gea w 310 Spare Tie eisai sag Gas dri Grae dus 295 296 335 Spark Plugs seteris Got fep adie 356 Speakers Fold Down 2 00 00 0 00 eee 161 Specifications Oll sage si hee shibgedekde eR dan hatte he 354 Speed Control Cruise Control 130 177 Speedometer os 173 Starting seek ep acer dug E eR Scene ee eg S 239 Automatic Transmission s 239 Engine Fails to Start llle 241 Manual Transmission isses 239 Starting Procedures lios 239 Steering POWOE ua eacbaen s Roos cR E RERO eC 282 362 Tilt Colin im E eer eem 130 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 6 eee 224 ocn M pL 385 Stuck Freeing ek rb e Rr Dex ed 342 Sun Roof Lei dtes e AE ig eter dinate 149 Sun Visor Extension cles 82 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 48 Synthetic Engine Oil 1 6 ee ee 355 System Navigation llle 217 Tachometer 2 c Rn Taillights 54 esee eme
110. ERATING 327 NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness RUNNING BATTERY The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle LAMPS but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector MER Refer to the following illustrations LH STOP RH TURN STOP RIGHT E DO Os TURN STOP TURN ELECTRIC m LEFT FEMALE GROUND BRAKES STOP TURN C PINS 812634c6 PARK mie 7 Pin Connector Towing Tips GND en MALE PIN Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy 813262be traffic 4 Pin Connector 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Main tenance Schedule in Section 8 for transmission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce the potential for engine and transmission overheating take the following actions City Driving
111. ERE GR Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 432 INDEX BEEN Tether Anchor Child Restraint 64 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 0 0 0 0 eae 160 Tilt Steering Column 00000 130 Tire and Loading Information Placard 287 Tire Identification Number TIN 286 Tire Markings ise 909s REA aed 283 Tire Safety Information 06 283 Tres erered serer ewe dem dU Wed 71 291 415 Aging Life of Tires 2 0 cee ene 298 AirPressure wi cia eee eee e 291 AlipnmenE bgpesePegvidecidbses ees des 300 Chains ces AREA eee ERE ea Y 300 Changing us stes paca Ue Saha os 334 Compact Spare susce edP hex 295 Flat Changing 4s r4 E 3k eerhyS 339 General Information 00 291 High Speed iuc aga ee ita Me eee as 294 Inflation Pressures 0 0 0 0 ce eee ae 292 JACKING 2x s aiee Se aa eae ave Re 2 334 LEife of TWeS adieu ace EY ina Peden 298 Load Capacity scien es 287 288 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 301 Quality Grading xe itet re a nmasi 415 Radial decr Sh sea tne Seis eal nd MEE EHE a E EN 295 Replacement is6iesreed een EG esis 298 ROADON 2 ded vote E UR RS E REEA 300 Dafety Sess see RES eng ae EE ee aie 283 291 SIZES eso oe Sich sch a Pade aes ia AAR ae Se WR SS 284 Snow Tires 2 4 23 e440 34690448209 4 844 310 Spare Tre 4 5 gassed 39 pla wai
112. ERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 WARNING Using Speed Control On Hills NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up Speed Control can be dangerous where the system and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could is normal go too fast for the conditions and you could lose i EN control An accident could be the result Don t use On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are it may be preferable to drive without speed control winding icy snow covered or slippery ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS IF EQUIPPED This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplan ing Only a safe attentive and skillful drive
113. ES 243 Drive Belts serene sunl pol A 356 Drivers Seat Back Tilt llle 112 Driving Off Pavement llle 252 OF Road 2x Xe bARIdG Indie RR 252 On Slippery Surfaces ss crass d erransa take 275 Electric Remote Mirrors 0 00000 Electrical Power Outlets llle Electronic Brake Control System Anti Lock Brake System 00 Brake Assist System 000000 Electronic Roll Mitigation Electronic Stability Program Traction Control System 0000 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 422 INDEX M Electronic Stability Program ESP 138 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 183 Emergency In Case of Jacking 22144035 292085224 PERS a opis 334 Jump Starting spond ee o Rc oes 340 TOWING augen oboe rr Y ES Oe vac es 343 Emission Control System Maintenance 350 400 Engine 2 24 una ef b e RS ERE TREES ss 69 348 Break In Recommendations 69 Checking Oil Level e sepies eR bows 352 COOLS s cca serui OR RUE ded WCE ace dad 365 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 000 000 314 Fuel Requirements 0000 311 Jump Starting 20 546 cae Le nea oe S 340 Qil uus cuu E BA De nae 352 395 396 Oil Change Interval lesen 354 Oil Filler Cap isses n 348 354 Oi Filter uuu GO EAST 396 OilSelection llle 354 Oil Synthetic lt 0 ee agai Ae d Res 355 Opera
114. Genuine Parts in Sec un Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propy lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to five years or 100 000 miles before replacement To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi tive Technology HOAT coolant When adding coolant a minimum solution of 50 rec ommended Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technol ogy or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to
115. ION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the vehicle E E E E E E registration and title Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION ME VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E Word About Your Keys 5 12 Ignition Key Removal 0 12 Locking Doors With The Key 14 Key In Ignition Reminder 14 WM Sentry Key 422s sor en 15 Replacement Keys estoa iaraa n rinkassa 16 Customer Key Programming 17 General Information 000 18 E Security Alarm System If Equipped 18 To Set The Security Alarm 18 To Disarm The Security Alarm System 19 Security Alarm System Manual Override 19 ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped 19 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 20 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 21 Using The Panic Alarm 21 To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock 22 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTI
116. If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for a Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the Learn or Training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for ea
117. NALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE OUTLET Low PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE 9 l NA A gt BRAKE SYSTEM KEY ACTIVATE UPPERAND LOWER HEATEDSEAT WINDOWLIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE t e oU C 4 aw Cv HOOD RELEASE LOWERAIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK OUTLET A WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM C p e 4 V awo srake LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ANDLIFTGATE DEFR STAND VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOURWHEEL WARNING PARKING OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE rH Ji 6 Ri b y HAUL VOICE SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIRCONDITIONING _ CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON d S ON ta Low LOWER ANCHORS SLIDINGDOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER ANDTETHERFOR UGONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE LOW DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO 8191e970 INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS zs 2 This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICAT
118. NG YOUR VEHICLE Se Programming Additional Transmitters 22 W Occupant Restraints 0000 39 General Information sssaaa aaaea aeea 24 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 0 36 Transmitter Battery Replacement 24 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 41 la Door Locks 5s BR E Rex 26 Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt arial GAWLER oucpes zi etre e 26 Operating Instructions lille 42 ee en ere E ir S 27 Seat Belt Pretensioners 0 0 45 Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors If Equipped 00000 30 BeltAlert 2 0 ee ee ee ee 46 ll Power Windows If Equipped 32 Seat Belt Extender 0 0 000 00000 47 Power Window Switches llle 32 peak Belg ANd Pregnant WOMEN scq dap eee d Ato DOWN M Teo o o ERR Window Lockout Switch sus 33 Eene Dats oda HOR s comet dated 58 Boro PEPPER 33 Child Restraint peses aeus kms 60 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 ll Engine Break In Recommendations 69 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside Remain MEORUM MET 69 HG VEMO draia nia ia a m Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Exhaust GaS 224 2 34 22 SOR m POS Red 69 The
119. NTROLS The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains R 134a a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer vias Cental in the upper atmosphere The Climate Control System allows you to balance the temperature amount and direction of air circulating The controls are as follows throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio Mote Contol tair Darestion The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the con trol is to a particular mode the 81caad23 more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel 7 Airis directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct air Climate Control Location flow 81a3ffa3 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demister outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demister outlets This setting works best in cold o
120. ON AA 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires 811adOdO Tire Placard Location 288 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight
121. OUR VEHICLE M show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is defective High Beam Control Push the Multifunction Control Lever away from you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam Pull the Multifunc tion Control Lever toward you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Passing Light Off Road Lights If Equipped You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by CAUTION lightly pulling the Multifunction Control Lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released The auxiliary Off Road lights mounted on the front bumper should be illuminated during Off Road Use Only Having them illuminated on public streets highways roads etc may be illegal in your state Your state may also require auxiliary Off Road NOTE If the Multifunction Control Lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation lights to be
122. Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears to make your selection Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the RKE transmitter Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears to make your selection Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the UConnect system are confirmed Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Display English or Metric The EVIC odometer and navigation system units can be changed between English and Metric Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until US or METRIC appears to make your selection UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings In order to ensure compass accuracy the Com pass Variance should be set to the zone number on the Compass Variance map that corresponds to the current location of the vehicle NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the Instrument Panel Thi
123. RNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine OFF to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure an accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only the manufacturer s recom mended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid types Front Suspension Ball Joints There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are permanently lubricated Inspect these ball joints when ever under vehicle service is done Damaged seals and their corresponding potentially damaged ball joints must be replaced en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors liftgate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit After lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fal
124. S OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 The HomeLink buttons that are located in the head liner or the sun visor designate the three different HomeLink WARNING channels Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety stan dards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient
125. The heated seat switches are located on the instrument panel below the radio After turning on the ignition you may choose OFF HIGH or LOW heat settings An indica tor on the switch shows which setting has been chosen Pressing the switch once will select HIGH level heating Pressing the switch a second time will select LOW level heating Pressing the switch a third time will shut the heating elements OFF When HIGH level heating is selected the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated The heat output then drops to the normal HIGH level If HIGH level heating is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level heating after about 30 minutes of continuous opera tion At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Opera tion on LOW level heating also turns off automatically after about 30 minutes es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 NOTE If HIGH level heating is selected heat will be felt within two to three minutes Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Control 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Folding Rear Seat To provide additional storage area each rear seatback can be folded forward Pull the strap forward to move the seat forward and flat Rear Seat Folded Flat Folding Re
126. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging Flashlight If Equipped The dual function light is mounted in the headliner above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area and part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight when needed The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for convenience To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high twice for low and a third time to return to off Press And Release A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 818144f5 Removing Flashlight Three Press Switch 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped 3 The liftgate may be opened or closed with the cargo To cover the cargo area cover in place 1 Grasp the center portion of the cover flap Pull it over Cargo Cover Removal WARNING In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and the cargo area strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle 1 Detach the cargo area cover and allow it to retract 2 Grasp cargo area cover assembly and push against
127. Vehicle z 3 uuu ue eer ees 7 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys Ask your 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a Manual Transmission fe pl 2 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to A sca the LOCK position 3 Remove the key from the lock cylinder 81182d3d Vehicle Key E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 3 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position 4 remove the key from the lock cylinder Ignition Key Positions Automatic Transmission If Equipped 1 Place the shift lever in PARK ere aia Ignition Key Positions 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position eee y ccn 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become trapped tem porarily in the ignition cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as de scribed If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service
128. When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion mE X2290 S83TARTING AND OPERATING 329 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground Recreational Towing Chart Recreational Towing Condition Manual Transmission Vehicles Automatic Transmission Vehicles Four Wheel Flat Tow all wheels on Yes Never round Two Wheel Dolly Tow rear wheels on Never Never ground Flat Bed Tow all wheels on bed of truck Yes Yes NOTE ONLY vehicles equipped with a MANUAL TRANSAXLE may be recreationally towed flat towed at any legal highway speed for any distance if the MANUAL TRANSAXLE is in NEUTRAL and the igni tion key is in the ACC position 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION e DO NOT FLAT TOW any vehicle equipped with an AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Damage to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transaxle will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recr
129. YOUR VEHICLE ME To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock NOTE The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be turned on or off On EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Personal Settings under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 For vehicles not equipped with an EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the UNLOCK button for four to 10 seconds 2 While the UNLOCK button is pressed after four seconds press the LOCK button Release both buttons 3 Test the flash lights with LOCK feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Programming Additional Transmitters Vehicles are shipped from the assembly plants with two RKE transmitter programmed only for that vehicle A total of eight RKE transmitter can be programmed for your vehicle Additional RKE transmitter can be pro grammed to your vehicle through the use of a currently programmed RKE transmitter NOTE When entering program mode using that RKE transmitter all other programmed RKE transmitters will be erased
130. a corresponding button number will be displayed Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Operating Instructions CD Mode for CD Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable com pact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SEEK Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left
131. a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure DO NOT make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mi 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes 294 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from
132. a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 3 Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly refer to information on Child Restraint in this section should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats 4 Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buck led up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arms 5 If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint refer to information on Child Restraint in this section 6 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 7 All occupants should use their seat belts properly 8 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate 9 If your vehicle has side curtain airbags do not lean against the doors as airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 10 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If You Need Customer Assistance section in this manual 52
133. a will be provided to the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be dis closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of DaimlerChrysler product litigation involving a 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that may be recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the 2o airbag system Airbag disable light status if equipped Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICL
134. acard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence
135. activate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the speed control lever toward you CANCEL normal braking or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the speed control is ON speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is ON push down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases Manual Transaxle Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed control A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed control disengages is normal Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss ee UND
136. ad Package The Freedom Drive II Off Road Package provides excel lent capability on and off road The package includes e 2 4L DOHC 16 Valve 14 172 bhp 6000 RPM 165 lb ft 4400 RPM e Second generation continuously variable transaxle CVT2L with 19 1 crawl ratio e Tow Hooks two front and one rear Front engine and transaxle skid plate Fuel tank skid plate Air filtration system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 253 Unique springs for a 1 in 2 5 cm of increased ride height Fog lamps Seat height adjust Three mode Electronic Stability Program ESP Hilldescent control Unique off road engine calibration for optimum off road performance with premium fuel Off road Brake Traction Control Unique off road Anti lock brake calibration Heavy duty cooling package Eng larger CVT oil cooler High capacity cooling fans Heavy duty alternator Improved body sealing and high located drivetrain component vents e Reinforced rear lateral links Freedom Drive Il 4WD System Operation Under normal driving conditions the vehicle operates in the active 4 wheel drive mode Pulling up on the 4WD lock lever activates the 4WD system and lights the amber 4WD cluster light This commands a higher torque to the rear wheels for improved traction capability on slippery roads The active 4 wheel drive mode has the same functionality with the Freedom Drive I system Shifting the transaxle gear select lever into Low Off Road mode with t
137. additional part is physi cally held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transpond
138. adiator antifreeze Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil change or lubrication Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to
139. ain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for the coolant freeze point or replacing the coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottl
140. air In this case set the Mode control at or between J and E if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the vi In very cold weather 8160180a ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Window Fogging Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy or humid weather To clear the windows set mode to the mix or defrost position Direct the panel outlets toward the side windows Do not use recirculate without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by using the defrost position If the fogging problem persists clean the inside window surfaces The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect ing on the inside surface of the glass NOTE In cold weather the use of the recircu late position will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle Moisture and ice can also accumulate on the inside of the sheet metal and may result in headliner and or electronic component damage For maximum defogging press the recirculation button until recirculate is off Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Outside Air Intake When opera
141. air into the vehicle The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the CAUTION gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle s e A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc surface tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the 5 fuel tank is full Fuel Filler Door Features 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and Federal fire regula tions and will cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to turn on NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas co
142. al Operator Manual 5 414 Paint Cate iu scere 3 Sa rate BUR ata aloe RA 376 Panic Alarm ccc be eae aee 21 Parking Brake 0 0 eee 276 Passing Light eniro poo RESTE 125 Personal Settings 0 0 6 00 ce eee eens 187 Pets iude RE Woo bh a ENGS 63 P3 Ave hace Soha 68 Phone Cellular 2 53 3 82 Phone Hands Free UConnect 82 Placard Tire and Loading Information 287 Power Distribution Center Fuses 382 Door Locks case aida Cte al 27 MITOS es is ack Siac nra a Mba By alk kA eae ah 80 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 152 DIGeTIDg a ceedxe d x eae aaa OR RR oe das 282 362 Steering Checking 43e aee ees 362 SUDEOOE cu eta a e enh Ede eg IN ALS 149 Transfer Unit 6234 84 48 o ES G RED RES 375 WindoWS cosa ex M order donc PR enrad 32 Power Steering Fluid 004 397 Power Transfer Unit 0 000005 375 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 48 Preparation for Jacking 06 335 Pretensioners Seat Bells prera nirre e bap Ge aoe cA E 45 en INDEX 429 Programmable Electronic Features 187 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry lille 22 Radial Ply Tires 5 2 eere eene 295 Radio Broadcast Signals 04 193 Radio Navigation 00 0000 eee 217 Radio Operation 0 195 203 226 Radio Satellite llle 217 220 Radio Sound Systems
143. and you will have to reprogram them for your vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Use the following procedure to program additional RKE transmitters if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this program ming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Turn the ignition to the ON position Do not start the engine 5 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter 6 After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within six seconds 7 When a single chime is heard release both buttons The chime is an indication that you have successfully entered program mode All RKE transmitters that are to be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime is heard 8 Using the RKE transmitter to be programmed press and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons simul taneously 9 A single chime will be heard 10 Within four seconds of hearing the chime press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter 11 A single chime will be heard 12 Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six additional RKE transmitters 13 Turn the ignition to the OFF position 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 14 Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60 seconds from w
144. ar Seat ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped Folding Rear Seat Reclining The Rear Seat 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN For additional comfort pull the strap forward just TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD enough to release the seatback latch Then push the To open the hood two latches must be released First pull seatback to a reclined position approximately 35 degrees the hood release lever located on the left kick panel maximum and release the strap WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat Primary Hood Release Lever and using a seat belt properly ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Then move the safety catch located under the front edge To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to of the hood near the center and raise the hood close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 8 i in 20 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle
145. argo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg 200 STARTING AND OPERATING M Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo MINUS from Tire Placard weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Combined Occupant s AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 los TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 WARNING 1 Safety WARNING eImproperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them e Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure WARNING Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure eOver inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure eOver inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly
146. auses Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes of corrosion are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near sea coast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 Washing CAUTION e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch clear water metal and painted surfaces e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug Special Care and Tar Remover to remove e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once and to protect your paint finish Take care never to a month tch the paint Sew Tn ae e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint open finish e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repair
147. ay exist that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 27 Hill Descent Indicator Light If Equipped The symbol illuminates is armed when the e 4WD Lock switch is activated and the trans mission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE position Off Road Mode 28 Front Fog Light Indicator Light If Equipped O This light shows when the front fog lights are on 29 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Iraction Control System TCS Indicator Light If Equipped If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the ESP or TCS if equipped 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 30 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light The malfunction light for the ESP is combined ESP with BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning BAS Light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers
148. ay result from improper towing If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the trans mission remains in NEUTRAL Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position A dolly should be used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam age to the vehicle Battery power is required to release the brake transmission interlock system There is a removable plug in the right side of the shift lever housing that allows you to insert your finger to override the system The ignition key must be in the ON position to use the override lever Towing this Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing with All Four Wheels on the Ground CAUTION DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the driv etrain will result MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment Gasoline 348 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDIL 349 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 349 H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs cas enedat ed ie etr s 350 Bl Replacement Parts a2 eex xr n Rn 351 Bl Authorized Dealer Service 005 352 Bl Maintenance Procedures 352 Eneine OW zt dose Respeto dee aae os 352
149. ble personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector STARTING AND OP
150. button and the time of day will be displayed for five seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE AUDIO con trol 3 After the hours are adjusted press the TUNE AUDIO control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes by turning the TUNE AUDIO control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the Rewind Fast Forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the rotary TUNE control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL ANCE will displa
151. can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or muddy e Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water you need to determine if you can cross it safely and responsibly If necessary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom con ditions On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross E STARTING AND OPERATING 269 e Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to determine you can safely
152. ce it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CDs on the 6 disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If a disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching a disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store a disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose a disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store a disc where temperatures may become too high 8 Do not play discs that are small in size or have irregular shapes RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 CLIMATE CO
153. ch Classification Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for drivetrain package content All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on The following chart provides the industry standard for your vehicle the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can en STARTING AND OPERATING 321 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt See Note 1 2 4L Auto Man 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1000 Ibs 453 kg 150 Ibs 68 kg 2 4L Auto Man with Trailer Tow Prep Pack 32 sq ft 3 0 Sq m 2000 Ibs 907 kg 225 Ibs 102 kg age AHC Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds Note 1 The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information Section in this manual 322 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60
154. ch as song title and artist press the MSG or INFO button A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting A Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for the next channel Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and release the SCAN button if equipped to automatically change channels every seven seconds The radio will pause on each channel for seven seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each channel change Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock ing Please have your ESN SID information available ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Storing And Selecting Preset Channels In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM preset stations you may also commit 12 satellite stations to pushbutton memory These satellite channel preset stations will not erase any AM or FM preset memory stations Follow the memory preset procedures that apply to your radio Using The PTY Program Type Button If Equipped Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio PTY Button SCAN When the desired program t
155. ch remaining button DO NOT erase the channels ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator Security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also
156. cle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning 310 STARTING AND OPERATING EE limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States 0 00 000 KR5S120123 Canada iss xe shes ae dba aos 2671 S120123
157. control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed like normal When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi nal set speed HDC is only intended for low speed off road driving At vehicle speeds above 31 mph 50 km h HDC will no longer function If the HDC indicator light begins to flash this indicates that the brakes are getting too hot and the vehicle should be stopped to allow the brakes to cool WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over steering or under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steering or under steering condi tion Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steer or under steer conditio
158. d apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the transmission shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle 248 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward until it stops e Look at the shift indicator window on the shift lever bezel to ensure it is in the PARK position You must depress the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the steering wheel and shift lever are released Otherwise dam age to the steering column or shift lever could result You must also depress the brake pedal REVERSE Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL The engine may be started in this range DRIVE This should be used for most driving and provides the best ratio for optimum drivability fuel economy and performance LOW This range should be used for maximum engine braking when descending steep grades In this range the trans axle will ratio up only to prevent transaxle damage or engine over speed while ratio down will occur as early as possibl
159. d from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the control lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected 81918d41 Washer Control If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles then turn off es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Mist Feature l l l CAUTION Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted 81918d45 Mist Control 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT STEERING COLUMN To tilt the steering column push down on the lever below WARNING the turn signal control lever With one hand firmly on the Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is wheel move the steering column up or down as desired moving is dangerous Without a
160. d seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap
161. damage your vehicle e During the first 500 mi 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings 324 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weigh
162. detent for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for headlight operation Headlight Control 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped rotate the center portion of the Multifunction Control The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running Lever up or down Lights DRL at DRL intensity lower whenever the E ES ignition is on the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the shift lever is in any position except park Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Dimmer Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Fog Lights If Equipped NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the head lights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Turn Signals s Front Fog Lights Control ZO The front fog light switch is on the Multifunction Control Lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull Turn Signal Control out the end of the Multifunction Control Lever Move the Multifunction Control Lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF Y
163. door gate ajar and loose gas cap Loose gas cap will be displayed from the Odometer Trip Odometer on all models NOTE If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the instru ment cluster all warnings including door and gATE will only be displayed in the EVIC display For additional information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter If Equipped in Section 3 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined Change Oil Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer butt
164. ducts Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing the Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems wi
165. dway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped This system maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during off road driving situations HDC will auto matically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to between 4 mph 7 km h and 6 mph 9 km h depending on terrain The system is activated by placing the vehicle in Off Road mode and placing the shift lever in LOW or REVERSE Refer to Safe Off Road Driving under Starting and Operating in Section 5 E e When HDC is properly enabled the Hill De cent Control light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only activate when the vehicle is descending a hill It will not activate on level ground If desired HDC can be fully deactivated by putting the vehicle into ESP Full Off mode This is done by pressing and holding the ESP OFF button for five seconds Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP in this section of the manual HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversely if more speed is desired during HDC
166. e 278 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as standard equipment In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function How ever the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system oper ating WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa bility the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop In addition if the
167. e Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose rout ing to b
168. e ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED Autostick Operation Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control Autostick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Automatic ratio changes upward will only occur to protect the Continuously Variable Automatic Transaxle CVT and or the engine from overspeed Changes down will only happen at minimum engine speed to prevent stall ing Autostick Shifter NOTE Autostick is not functional until the CVT warms up in cold weather 250 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Autostick operation is activated in the DRIVE position by moving the shift lever side to side Moving the shift lever to the side will activate Autostick and shift up to the next higher manual ratio unless you are already operating in or near Overdrive in which case 6th ratio will be selected In like manner moving the shift lever to will activate Autostick and shift to the next lower manual ratio After Autostick is activated the manual ratio selected is displayed in the transmission ratio display and tipping the shift lever to the or direction will cause an upshift or
169. e out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular
170. e 90 F 32 C Change Rear Drive Assembly RDA fluid 60 000 100 000 60 1 Change Power Transfer Unit PTU fluid 60 000 100 000 60 M Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using Id your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or 60 000 100 000 60 S frequent trailer towing H Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary t 90 000 150 000 90 P P Ty Flush and replace the engine coolant 102 000 170 000 60 Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter 120 000 200 000 120 Replace Accessory Drive Belt s 120 000 200 000 120 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405 t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or For Your Vehicle emere RE eres 409 Speech Impaired TDD TIY 411 Prepare For The Appointment 409 Service Contract iios ova pr EE EE Eae 411 Prepare A Elster eta eee ded sess 400 MH War
171. e CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading LOAD EJECT Eject Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc LOAD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CDs in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a two minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for two minutes After two minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode MSG or INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the message display priority mode or elapsed time display priority mode will display the song title for each file RW FF CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the MP3 s
172. e engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this proce dure carefully EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 WARNING Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured NOTE Disconnecting the battery with the ignition in the ON position will cause vehicles with an automatic transaxle CVT2 to go into default mode and turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL See your autho rized dealer to correct this condition 1 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK the manual transmis sion in NEUTRAL and turn the ignition to OFF for both vehicles 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 3 Using the two finger screws on the cover remove the air intake duct covering the battery 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the dis charged battery 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Battery fluid is a corrosi
173. e master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one system will not affect the other system The manual transaxle clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See your local authorized dealer for service Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts under Section 8 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 WARNING WARNING Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in boiling point or is unidentified as to specification spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the may result in sudden brake failure during hard brake fluid catching fire prolonged braking You could have an accident
174. e outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE BEEEEEEEEEEREMARMAMMAMMMEEEEEC NN POWER WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED Power Window Switches Power Window Switch Location The driver s door panel has up down switches that give you finger tip control of all four power windows There is a single open and close switch on each passenger door panel for passenger window control The windows will operate only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position ACC position and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or the driver s door is opened Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 Auto Down The driver s door window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCKOUT
175. e recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from your vehicle Used oil indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high quality oil filters and
176. e sure hoses do not touch any heat source or moving component that may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of degradation that could cause failure Fuel System Connections Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are designed with tubes and special connects connections and clamps which have unique material characteristics to provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deterio rated gasoline You are urged to use only the manufacturer s specified tubes connections and clamps or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to Maintenance Schedule under Section 8 WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake And Power Steering System Hoses When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance inspect the s
177. eational towing WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 332 B if Your Engine Overheats 0 332 Bl Automatic Transaxle Overheating 333 H Jacking And Tire Changing 334 Jack Location 1 0 2 00000 334 Spare Tire Stowage 0 0 0 eee eee 335 Preparations For Jacking 335 Jacking Instructions hesione ia 336 li Jump Starting Procedures Due To A Low Battery casi suse ba ges ded iet H Freeing A Stuck Vehicle leues E Towing A Disabled Vehicle With Ignition Key 2 22 ce RR Without The Ignition Key 344 332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Depress the switch and both cluster indicators and all front and rear directional signals will flash Depress the switch again to turn Hazard Warning Flashers off Do not use this emergency warning system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following s
178. eatures in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if equipped side airbags for both the driver and front passenger If you will be carrying children too small for adult size seat belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as Gas props support the liftgate in the open position possible However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of
179. ed into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If the volume control is ON the unit will switch to CD mode and begin to play The display will show the track number and play time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one NOTE e On some vehicles you may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition switch OFF 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player e This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks SEEK Button CD Mode Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current track or return to the beginning of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD Mode Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track To stop the scan function press the button a second time EJECT Button CD Mode Press this button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the last s
180. eful deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity This vehicle may also be equipped with side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG Side Curtain Airbag Location NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstruc tions If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments b
181. ehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmis sion in park a manual transmission in reverse Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard warning flasher EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground Jacking Locations CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in Step 3 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 3 There are two front jacking locations and two rear jacking locations on each side of the body The front locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts the rear ones by two rectangular cutouts For vehicles equipped with plastic trim the plastic
182. elected mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear TIME Button CD Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF CD Mode Press and hold the FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing RND SET Button Random Play Button CD Mode Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random play Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical device is plugged into the
183. election 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M TUNE Control CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the TUNE control allows the adjustment of Tone Balance and Fade AM FM Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode RND PTY Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly SET DIR Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the SET DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or move through available folders Press the TUNE control to select a folder Buttons 1 6 CD Mode for MP3 Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of this Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of this Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 SALES CODE REC AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM 81c704b4 Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3 Capability REC combines a CGlobal Positioning System based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identification selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of d
184. elt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 mi 500 km After the initial 60 mi 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factor
185. equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ABS light monitors the ABS System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds ies If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning light and the ABS light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS is required en STARTING AND OPERATING 281 When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping co
186. er blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Secu rity Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys
187. er housing that allows you to insert your finger to override the system The key must be in the ignition and in the ON position to use the override lever If this occurs obtain service as soon as possible Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON position and the brake pedal is depressed NOTE Ifa malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Gear Ranges For Continuously Variable Automatic Transaxle CVT DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range ee STARTING AND OPERATING 247 PARK Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis sion The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first and then place the shift Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is n running Before exiting a vehicle you should always lever in the PARK position shift the vehicle into PARK remove the key from the ignition an
188. er second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavail able NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associ ated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permis sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction ie pursuant to a warrant A copy of the dat
189. er the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or ESP Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off AWD Models or On 2WD Models This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the ESP Indicator Light will be illuminated This mode is in tended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Full Off AWD Models Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu verability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by depressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the
190. es to Continuously Variable Transaxle CVT Fluid CVTF 4 CVTF 4 is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Manual Transaxle Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts under Section 8 Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more that 3 16 in 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary lubricant has become contaminated with water NOTE If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD 4WD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts under Section 8 Fluid Level Check Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 in 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Freq
191. estina tions and routes AM FM stereo radio and six disc CD changer with MP3 capability Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a DVD that is loaded into the unit One map DVD covers all of North America Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Clock Setup GPS Clock wv REC Setting the Clock GPS Clock The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set 1 At the Main Menu screen highlight Clock Setup and press ENTER OR press and hold for three seconds the TIME button on the unit s faceplate The Clock Setup screen appears 2 To show the GPS clock select Displayed Clock GPS Clock and press ENTER 3 To adjust the time zone Select Time Zone and press ENTER Select the appropriate time zone and press ENTER es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Clock Setup 4 To turn daylight savings on or off select Daylight Savings and press ENTER Select On or Off and press ENTER 5 Select DONE to exit from t
192. etected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove obstruction and press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the close position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and hold the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of the sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting
193. euvers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area You should use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and ESP turned off Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure 262 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points While driving off road you will encounter many types of terrain These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles Before proceeding review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object WARNING Crossing
194. f the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have been shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends using gasolines without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not their gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 Materials Added To Fuel overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or All gasoline sold in the United States is required to some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or contain effective detergent additives Use of additional malfunctioning and may require immediate service detergents or other additives is not needed under normal Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these Fuel System Cautions products contain high concentrations of Methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems CAUTION resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not mm the responsibility of the man
195. for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME The pretensioners are triggered by the Airbag Control Module refer to information on Airbags in this section Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occu pants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Daim
196. g large obstacles with steep sides Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a roll over If you get caught in a rut dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45 degree angle ahead of the front tires Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45 degree angle WARNING There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle at any angle with steep sides 260 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Crossing Logs To cross a log approach it at a slight angle approxi mately 10 to 15 degrees This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log While climbing the log modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes CAUTION Do not attempted to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high centered Getting High Centered If you get hung up or high centered on an object get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle Depend ing on what you are in contact with jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight
197. g names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook The UConnect phonebook nametag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the phonebook You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your ce
198. he EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343 CAUTION front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE VERSE and 1st gear Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin ning the wheels is most effective WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle tire damage or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transaxle overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h Do not spin the wheels continu ously for more than 30 seconds TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE With Ignition Key Automatic And Manual Transaxle Front wheel drive vehicles must have the front wheels elevated 4 wheel drive vehicles must be hauled on a flatbed truck 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 2All Transaxles CAUTION If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ACC position not in the LOCK position Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle m
199. he 4WD lock lever active lights the amber off road and 4WD cluster lights This off road mode gives the combined benefits of a 19 1 crawl ratio hill descent braking optimum off road performance with premium fuel and off road brake traction control for improved traction capability off road In low the transaxle CVT2L initially maintains the 19 1 crawl ratio before changing ratio This low ratio is ideal for crawling over obstacles 254 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Freedom Drive Il Off Road Features The following are key off road features which are active when the system has the 4WD lock lever engaged and is in the Low Off Road mode Hill Descent Braking Hill descent braking uses the vehicle braking system to provide a controlled descent down varying grades This feature is only active when the system has the 4WD lock lever engaged and is in the Low Off Road mode or reverse Hill descent braking can be turned off by turning off ESP The hill decent control speed varies between 4 6 mph 6 10 km h forward 3 mph 5 km h reverse Off Road Brake Traction Control When conditions warrant the vehicle braking system transfers torque from side to side It does not control throttle input unlike normal traction control which is active in Normal Drive mode 19 1 Crawl Ratio When the system has the 4WD lock lever engaged and is in the Low Off Road mode the CVT2L initially maintains the 19 1 crawl ratio before changing ratio This
200. he clock setting mode Press ENTER to save your changes If you press CANCEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved User Defined Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the system clock you can manually adjust the time by choosing the User Defined Clock option 1 At the Clock Setup screen highlight Displayed Clock User Defined Clock 2 To increase the clock by hours make sure HR is highlighted and press ENTER Press ENTER again to increase the clock by another hour You will see on the User Defined Time display the number of hours you have increased the clock by 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 3 To decrease the clock by one hour use the Select Encoder to highlight the sign Press ENTER Press ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour 4 To increase the clock by minutes make sure MIN is highlighted and press ENTER Press ENTER again to increase the clock by another minute 5 To decrease the clock by minutes use the Select Encoder to highlight the sign Press ENTER Press ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute 6 Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode Press ENTER to save your changes If you press CAN CEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscr
201. he oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation condition the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 mi 805 km EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 401 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been six months since your last oil change and even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 mi 10 000 km or six months whichever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described
202. he t 1 if the followi amage to the transaxle may occur if the following WARNING precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to It is dangerous to shift the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit is at idle speed someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 246 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC positions Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the shift lever out of PARK NOTE If a malfunction occurs the transaxle will not shift out of PARK Battery power is required to release the brake transmission interlock system There is a remov able plug in the right side of the shift lev
203. hen the doors are locked or unlocked using the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until 0 30 60 or 90 appears to make your selection Headlights On With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in this section 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system power sunroof and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature
204. hen the original chime was heard After 60 seconds all programmed RKE transmitters function normally NOTE If you do not have a programmed RKE trans mitter contact your authorized dealer for details General Information This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in the RKE transmitter The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not
205. highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 6 INTRODUCTION n JD MD qo X D WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB HIGH BEAM WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE it w x d y 7 P4 u r FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING LOW BEAM INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH 40 FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT WASHER FLUID LEVEL m g PE Qt WINDSHIELD ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG LAMP DEFROST HEATED BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION Y GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG STEERING FLUID AND WASHER I B E RIRBRG VT MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINTSYSTEM AIRBAG OFF e d H amp 4 BAS ELECTRONIC STABILITY TURN SIG
206. ht turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied there is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock Brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required The operation of the Brake Warning light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position
207. ife and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the Power Outlet 115 Volts 150 Watts battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 CONSOLE FEATURES WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with the console compart ment lid in the open position Cell phones music players and other hand held electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury The floor console s sliding armrest moves forward 3 in 76 2 mm to accommodate shorter drivers The armrest lid also includes a unique flip pocket for storing a phone or an MP3 player The bin inside the console can hold up to 10 CD jewel cases or other items securely out of sight Floor Console NOTE The flip pocket and console lid features are intended to be used in the upright or open position only while the vehicle is parked While driving all hand held devices should be properly stowed and the flip pocket and the console lid should be closed 156
208. igh WARNNG f ing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small WARNINGI to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap portion e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy NOTE For additional information refer to ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or www seatcheck org fatal injury to the infant ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip
209. ilation hose for indication of damage or plugging deposits Replace if necessary Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank frequent fuel filter replacement may be necessary The fuel filters are located inside the fuel tank See your authorized dealer for service Air Cleaner Element Filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule under Section 8 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 WARNING CAUTION The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection When servicing the battery always reinstall the bat in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air tery thermowrap The thermowrap provides battery cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or heat protection and will extend overall battery life maintenance Make sure that no one is near the Failure to reinstall the thermowrap can result in engine compartment before starting the vehicle with evaporative loss of the battery fluid the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Maintenance Free Battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE WARNING Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clam
210. ime you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after EVIC Functions performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure EVIC Button Press the EVIC button until one of the following func tions is displayed on the EVIC e Compass Temperature Audio e Average Fuel Economy 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Distance To Empty DTE e Elapsed Time e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM e Personal Settings To Reset The Display Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the function currently being displayed Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the EVIC button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will be dis played during this three second window Compass Temperature Audio Press and
211. include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 411 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 4568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for an vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail withi
212. inted on the Sdar Hands Free inside of the cover Refer to Engine Compartment in Phone this section of the Owner s Manual for the underhood 7 30Amp IOD Sense1 location of the IPM Green Cavity Cartridge Mini Description 8 30 Amp IOD Sense2 Fuse Fuse Green 1 Empty Empty 9 40 Amp Power Seats 15Amp AWD 4WD ECU Green Lt Blue Feed 10 20 Amp CCN Power Locks 3 10Amp CHMSL Brake Switch Yellow Red Feed 11 15 Amp Power Outlet 4 10 Amp Ignition Switch Feed Lt Blue Red 12 20 Amp Ign Run Acc Inverter 5 20 Amp Trailer Tow Yellow Yellow ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 13 20Amp Pwr run Acc Outlet 21 10Amp IOD Feed Intrus Yellow RR Red Mod Siren 14 10 Amp IOD CCN Interior 22 10 Amp IGN RUN Heat AC Red Lighting Red Compass Sensor 15 40 Amp RAD Fan Relay Bat 23 15 Amp ENG ASD Relay Feed Green tery Feed Lt Blue 3 16 15 Amp IGN Run Acc Cigar 24 15 Amp Power Sunroof Feed Lt Blue Ltr Sunroof Lt Blue 17 10 Amp IOD Feed Mod Wcm 25 10 Amp Heated Mirror Red Red 18 40 Amp ASD Relay Contact 26 15 Amp ENG ASD Relay Feed Green PWR Feed Lt Blue 2 19 20 Amp PWR Amp 1 amp Amp 27 10 Amp IGN RUN Only ORC Yellow 2 Feed Red Feed 20 15 Amp IOD Feed Radio 28 10 Amp IGN RUN ORC OCM Lt Blue Red Feed 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE
213. ions Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System 301 Mopar Parts cene ces ur ute y ee cens 351 413 Multi Function Control Lever 121 Navigation Radio seces sa aa diapa e a a i h uet 217 Navigation System llle 217 New Vehicle Break In Period 69 Occupant Restraints sesser ceama ee ce a ee 35 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 311 ODOMETER 4 yu spes verit dues m bd a la AS 179 ji CC C 177 179 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 252 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 252 Oil Change Indicator 00050 184 Oil Change Indicator Reset 184 Oil Engine iss aye es a uL E 352 395 Capacity ecquis USC Rn s SUR e o 4 395 Change Interval 0000005 354 Checking co ting ces ere RR eee Ene 352 Disposal aco tee bes xh pastes eee 355 Filter oes yu owe Yay aap tae PA RON E Aes 355 Identification Logo 428 INDEX BENE Materials Added to 000 0 355 Recommendation ess 354 395 Synthetic succes RIA RPG 355 ViscOSIly 2 63 ide Gia Ree e done ea Rope 354 Qil Pressure Light i seem ER Ross 173 Onboard Diagnostic System 349 350 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 142 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 Outside Air Intake llle 233 Overdrive ccs decdeheiiwedun i E 248 Overheating Engine isses sace mre tiras 332 Owner s Manu
214. iority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Dial by Saying a Number Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination Based on the country in which the ve hicle was purchased the UConnect system limits the user from dialing an invalid combination of numbers For example in the U S 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid U S phone number the closest valid phone number has 10 digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook To learn how to store a name in
215. ipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire DO NOT drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control EN STARTING AND OPERATING 297 Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions DO NOT spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously with out stopping when you are stuck For additional information refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one DO NOT spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicato
216. iption service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following procedure ESN SID Access with REF Radios With the ignition switch in the ACC position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simul taneously for three seconds The first four digits of the 12 digit ESN SID number will display Press the SEEK UP button to display
217. ire 2 00 cas kesh taeda ees 295 COMPASS g ses Saye hae epe ag re ORC rne 192 Compass Calibration 00000 192 Compass Variance 0 eee eee 191 Console iile em RE RR ete RS 155 Contract Service ee 411 Coolant Antifreeze leeren 395 396 Cooling System lees ees 365 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 367 Coolant Level llle 365 368 Disposal of Used Coolant 0 368 Drain Flush and Refill Ls 366 INSPECHON sine mer eder s RR RUE eh 368 Points to Remember 367 369 en INDEX 421 Pressure Cap sirmis Soh wes BH ae wee 367 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 366 Corrosion Protection 000 0000 376 Crankcase Emission Control System 358 Crise Tent arrear dintai ree ERR Ree ntes 177 Cupholders 5a os sr e e Sets 155 Customer Assistance 000000 409 Data Recorder Event llle 58 Dealer Service 460000344 o m RR n 352 Defroster Rear Window 163 Defroster Windshield LLL 70 228 Delay Intermittent Wipers issus 128 Diagnostic System Onboard 349 Dimmer Switch Headlight 124 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 368 Engine Oil iis ge a Re ES 355 Door Locks sss een 26 Door Locks Automatic esee 27 Door Opener Garage ees 142 Downshif ng 2620 e RR R
218. ires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Spare Tire and Jack Stowage Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the cargo area Spare Tire Removal Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down Preparations For Jacking Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoid ice or slippery areas set the parking brake and place the shift lever in PARK automatic transmission or REVERSE manual transmission Turn OFF the ignition WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335 e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel BLOCKA e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jacking Instructions BS Jack Warning Label Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the v
219. iring Down For Off Road Driving Running lower tire pressure off road can improve your ride comfort and vehicle traction Reducing the tire air pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly improving its surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or form to the ground contour Different terrain tires and vehicles require different tire pressure Hard surfaces like rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles You will need to experiment to determine what is right for your situation It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to replace it so start high and lower it as required Remem ber you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on road or at highway conditions Be sure you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road air pressure CAUTION Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire dam age and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure drive at slower speeds and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Vehicle Recovery If you drive off road you may encounter a situation where you will need to recover your vehicle Vehicle recovery should always be given consideration before attempting a questionable obstacle You should never go off road driving without the ability to recover your vehicle from a sit
220. is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving Secondary Hood Latch Lift the hood prop rod clipped to the right side left side facing hood of the engine compartment to secure the hood in the open position Place the hood prop at the location stamped into the inner hood surface 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHTS Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rear view mirror Each light is turned ON by pressing the button Press the button a second time to turn the light OFF The lights also come on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 81790d82 Map Reading Lights NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Multifunction Control Lever The Multifunction Control Lever controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signals headlight beam selection instrument panel light dimming interior lights the passing lights and the fog lights The Multi function Control Lever is located on the left side of the steering column Headlights Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights Turn the end of the Multifunction Control Lever to the first
221. is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti Lock Brakes The warning light should be checked frequently to assure that it is operating properly Turn the ignition key to the ON position but do not start the vehicle The light should come on If the light does not come on have the system checked by an authorized dealer 11 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will come on for about six seconds A chime will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt out of the retractor This is a reminder to buckle up If you do not buckle up the light will remain on 12 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 13 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi ew tion If the engine is critically hot a warning chime will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out 14 Brake System Warning Light O This light monitors various brake functions in cluding brake fluid level and parking brake appli cation If the brake lig
222. is section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is te
223. isplay It is located below the speedometer The EVIC consists of the following e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime e System status e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle not in PARK automatic transmissions or vehicle is in motion manual transmissions Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Gate Ajar with a single chime Headlights On e Key In Ignition e Check TPM System Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each t
224. ith a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 e For grease stains apply Mopar Multi purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Interior Care Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Clea
225. ith your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axle
226. ituations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e Incity traffic While stopped put the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime When safe pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark for more than a minute turn the engine off imme diately and call for service NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333 the engine cooling system and turning off the A C WARNING O S removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature WARNINGI control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or the fan control to HIGH This allows the heater core to act others could be badly burned by steam or boiling as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant You may want to call a service center if your from the engine cooling system vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Maintenance Section 7 of CAUTION this manual Follow the warnings under the Coo
227. ivate this feature repeat the above steps To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock feature can be turned on or off On EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Personal Settings under Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Section 4 For vehicles not equipped with an EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button for four to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after four seconds press the PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn On Lock and Flash Lamps With Lock features can be reactivated by repeating this pro cedure Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING
228. ke any system however automo tive radios have performance limitations due to mobile operation and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M TWO TYPES OF SIGNALS There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and six disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for up to 10
229. kly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplan ing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow mo
230. l and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 1 Lift the wiper arm away from the glass 2 Push the release tab and slide the wiper blade assem bly down along the arm Gently place the wiper arm on the windshield 3 Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip until it locks in place Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the rear of the engine compartment on the right side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not r
231. l be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value es STARTING AND OPERATING 303 NOTE ON e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s
232. l wells Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light en STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects In addition the EVIC will display a graphic of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing 81826bed Low Tire Pressure Display Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value The system will automatically update the 308 STARTING AND OPERATING ME graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extin guish once the updated tire pressure s have been re ceived The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this infor mation Check TPMS Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also
233. lb check If the Voltage Warning light remains on or comes on while driving it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See your authorized dealer 3 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control system If a prob lem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing however see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running you may experience power loss an elevated rough idle and increased brake pedal effort and your vehicle may require towing Immediate service is required The light will come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check This is normal If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 4 Oil Pressure Warning Light QE Shows low engine oil pressure The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON position and the light will turn off after the engine is started If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light comes on and remains on while driving stop
234. ld see an authorized dealer or repair facility If this vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicle as you normally would in order for the OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether the vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not ready if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have the vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS The use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE AUTHORIZED DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these service manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or aro
235. ld the LOAD EJT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CDs in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a two minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CDs in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 10 seconds If no discs are inserted within 10 seconds NO DISCS LOADED will be displayed On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF TIME Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD Mode for CD Audio Play Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button mm works in a similar manner Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature TUNE Control CD Mode for CD Audio Play Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone Fade and Balance See Radio Mode AM FM Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play Switches the Radio to the Radio mode 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RND PTY Button Random Play Butt
236. lerChrysler Corporation does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning Sys tem BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver or front passenger seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver or front passenger seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reac tivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt i
237. ling Driving with a hot cooling system could damage System Pressure Cap paragraph your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING pull over when safe and stop the vehicle with the During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up 6 engine at idle Turn the air conditioner OFF and wait long grades on hot days the automatic transaxle oil may until the pointer drops back into the normal range become too hot After appropriate achon has been taken if the If this happens the transmission overheat indi pointer remains on the H turn the engine OFF cator light will come on and the vehicle will immediately and call for service slow slightly until the automatic transaxle cools down enough to allow a return to the requested speed If the high speed is maintained the overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor WARNING in the cargo area e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing t
238. listed follow the interval that occurs first IY Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 6 000 10 000 6 C Rotate tires 6 000 10 000 6 E If using your vehicle for dusty or off road conditions in spect he engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 12 000 20 000 12 H Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 12 000 20 000 12 d Replace the air conditioning filter 12 000 20 000 12 D Inspect the CV Joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 U mi 20 000 km or 12 months 24 000 40 000 24 E Inspect Exhaust System Perform the first inspection at S 12 000 mi 20 000 km or 12 months 24 000 40 000 24 8 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals se if necessary 24 000 40 000 24 Replace the engine air cleaner filter 30 000 50 000 30 Replace the spark plugs 30 000 50 000 30 404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mile age are listed follow the interval that occurs first M A N T E M Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle W for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing fay heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more then 50 of 48 000 80 000 48 your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot H weather abov
239. ll be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be routed under the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seatback Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Rear Seat Tether Anchors Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder b
240. ll phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Emergency English Phonebook edia e mergenc Espanol oneboo Francais Last Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Phonebook Entries Listed one Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Enter Number Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on off
241. llowing more torque to be sent to the rear wheels The amber 4WD Indicator Light will come on in the cluster This can be done on the fly at any vehicle speed To deactivate simply pull on the switch one more time The 4WD Indicator Light will then go out NOTE Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP in the Electronic Brake Control System section of this manual for additional information Four Wheel Drive Switch 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ME FREEDOM DRIVE Il SAFE OFF ROAD DRIVING Off Road Driving Tips and Vehicle Characteristics The Freedom Drive II Off Road Package has excellent on and off road capabilities These off road capabilities will allow you to explore those wilderness trails where few travel providing a source of exciting and satisfying recreation Before you venture out you should contact your local governmental agency to determine what are the designated off road vehicle ORV trails or recreation areas You should always tread lightly and only use established roads trails or ORV recreational areas The National Forest Service Bureau of Land Management or local Department of Natural Resources are a wealth of information and usually have maps with marked trails NOTE For optimum off road performance premium fuel is recommended However your vehicle is equipped with an active spark knock system and can adjust the engine calibration for a varying range of fuel octane levels The Freedom Drive II Off Ro
242. lls below the low pressure warn ing limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The 302 STARTING AND OPERATING ME vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to ap proximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will stil
243. lt in false speedometer and odometer readings 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Alignment And Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in e Fast tire wear e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear e Vehicle pull to right or left Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your authorized dealer for proper diagnosis Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear TIRE CHAINS Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom mended CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of the tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the
244. m h Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped manual transmissions or the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position automatic transmissions Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st When DRIVER S DOOR 1ST is selected only the driv er s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button and requires a second press to unlock the remaining locked doors When REMOTE UNLOCK ALL DOORS is se lected all of the doors will unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until DRIVER S DOOR 1ST or ALL DOORS appears to make your selection ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash w
245. m your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recog nition button and say Iransfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice Recogni tion button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the UConnect system e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button at any time while
246. mpressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil or refrigerants Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized DaimlerChrysler Dealership WA
247. ms and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized selling dealer They know you and the vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and 410 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M high quality service The manufacturer s authorized deal ers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Cus tomer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should
248. must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be repro grammed 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This Security Alarm System monitors the doors hood liftgate and ignition switch for unauthorized operation If something triggers the Security Alarm the Security Alarm System will sound the horn for 30 seconds and flash the lights for 60 seconds If the triggering device is not deactivated the horn will sound again after a five second delay for another 30 seconds If the trigger remains present this cycle will repeat for up to five minutes To Set The Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door LOCK switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and close all doors 3 The Security Alarm indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for 16 seconds This shows that the system is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned ON or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner
249. n e Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESP Indicator Light The ESP Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active If the ESP Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING e Electronic Stability Program ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ESP Operating Modes The ESP system has three available operating modes for 4WD equipped vehicles and two available operating modes for 2WD equipped vehicles Full On AWD Models or On 2WD Models This is the normal operating mode for ESP Whenev
250. n tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down 268 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible man ner You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicles abilities and be able to recover it if some thing goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water first The key to any crossing is low and slow You want to use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 5 mph 5 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion CAUTION Water ingestion into the axles transmission transfer case engine or vehicle interior
251. n three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service 412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se Contract and you require service after the manufactur er s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm
252. ncluding a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the mp3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specification Samplin iam Hz Bit rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M
253. nditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You may also experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock mode e the ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations e aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS contains sophis ticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This in terference can cause possible loss of Anti Lock brak ing capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer 282 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substan
254. ne via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect system and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the numbe
255. ng service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 ft Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service cen ter menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the Voice Recognition button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect system will then ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system tim
256. ning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fre
257. not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were onl super to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 STARTING AND OPERATING 287 TIRE LOADING AND TIRE PRESSURE Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location F SEATING CAPACI TOTAL 5 Fi THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS NEVER EXCEED XXX K TIRE ORIGINAL TIR NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B Pillar P195 70R14 T125 70D15 H3 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATI
258. not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans axle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly so follow the procedure carefully See Section 6 of this manual for jump starting instructions Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended EN STARTING AND OPERATING 241 If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded Leave the ignition key in the ON position release
259. ns equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE Stick with the Specialists DaimlerChrysler Corporation AR 81 326 0812 Third Edition Printed in U S A
260. nt damage to the roof of your vehicle DO NOT Cargo must be securely tied down before driving carry any loads on the roof rack without cross rails installed your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the The load should be secured and placed on top of the cross B rails not directly on the roof If it is necessary to place the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per load on the roof place a blanket or some other protection sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack between the load and the roof surface Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the rated load capacity of your cross rail system or the roof rack system maximum load capacity of 150 lbs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward loads This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panel Features 170 Bl Instrument Cluster Premium
261. ntainers on the ground while filling Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly installed a gASCAP message will be displayed in the Odometer Trip Odom eter in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Description in Section 4 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer trip odometer RESET button to turn the message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time EN STARTING AND OPERATING 317 the vehicle is started Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II in Section 7 of this manual for more information CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system VEHICLE LOADING Vehicle Loading Capacities Front Seat Occupants Rear Seat Occupants L ggadg ease edm eet Vehicle Rated Capacity 175 Ibs 80 kg 925 Ibs 420 kg Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes the weight of your vehicle the driver passengers cargo and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do w
262. o this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 284 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Sizing Chart TIRE SIZING TERMS Size Designation P Passenger Car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger Car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in
263. obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to loose control of your vehicle Using A Spotter There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles In these cases have someone guide you over through or around the obstacle Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle watch your tires and undercarriage and guide you through en STARTING AND OPERATING 263 Crossing Large Rocks When approaching large rocks choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires CAUTION Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage CAUTION Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills Crossing A Ravine Gully Ditch Washout Or Rut When crossing a ravine gully ditch washout or a large rut the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle s mobility Approach these obstacles at a 45 degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently You need to use caution when crossin
264. ol 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the Rewind Fast Forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the rotary TUNE control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the tune control again or wait five seconds to exit setting tone balance and fade RND SET B
265. olts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee impact bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizens band radios etc NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the side curtain airbags Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee impact bolsters to provide im proved protection for the driver and front passenger Side curtain airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is so equipped the side curtain airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions However even in collisions where the airbags deploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position for the airbags to protect you prop erly en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and younger should ride buck led up in the rear seat 2 Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with
266. on CD Mode for CD Audio Play Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random play Buttons 1 6 CD Mode for CD Audio Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 i
267. on on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 25 OFF ROAD Indicator Light If Equipped The symbol illuminates is armed when the 4WD lock switch is activated and the transmission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE position 26 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL This light is part of an Onboard Diagnostic C system called OBD II that monitors emissions engine and automatic transmission control sys tems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the light does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing If the MIL flashes when the engine is running serious conditions m
268. one Pussaupio 1 AUX C c RND SET REF Radio 815eb156 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON Mode Button Radio Mode Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass station
269. ontrol buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio a The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 e For certain operations compound commands can be
270. or unpredictable braking You might pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati not have full braking power when you need it to cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when prevent an accident If you have been operating your there is a difference in the surface traction under the front vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked driving wheels and cleaned as necessary Failure to do so may result is serious injury WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc 276 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN TRACTION When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep the tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden sto
271. ow to prevent damage to heating elements Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Also keep all objects a safe distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating elements ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the luggage rack do not exceed the rated vehicle capacity This vehicle is not equipped with roof rack cross rails as built unless ordered as optional equipment Cross rails must be installed prior to carrying loads on the roof rack If not equipped your authorized dealer can order and install Mopar cross rails built specifically for this roof rack system or a number of aftermarket rails that are tailored to your lifestyle or activities NOTE The optional cross rails have seven specific locations identified by a feature on both the side rail and the cross rail Cross rails must be secured in one of the seven detent locations on the side rail to prevent move ment with a sudden stop For improved wind noise performance when cross rails are not in use place them in detent positions 2 second detent from the front of the vehicle and 7 detent closest to the rear of the vehicle as indicated with a unique feature on the side rails es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 CAUTION WARNING To preve
272. ower Door Locks A power door lock switch is located on the drivers door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switches Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Auto Lock feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped in Section 4 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Automatic Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position C 80e54ed7 Ignition Key Position 3 Depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Verify reprogramming by driving the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Auto Unlock The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles wi
273. p PARKING BRAKE When the parking brake is applied with the BRAKE ignition ON the Brake Light in the instrument cluster will come on NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is on It does not show the degree of brake application If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is moving a chime will sound to alert the driver The chime will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has returned to a stop Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is set To set the parking brake pull up firmly on the lever Also place the shift lever in the PARK position automatic transmission or REVERSE position manual transmission To release the parking brake apply the brake pedal pull up slightly on the lever then depress the button on the end of the lever and push the lever fully down toward the floor NOTE The parking brake lever will not release unless the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position umm Parking Brake Lever STARTING AND OPERATING 277 When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the automatic transmission locking mecha nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill grade You should always apply the parking brake before leav ing the vehicl
274. pening Injury may result Opening the Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Express Mode Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing the Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial close condition until the switch is pushed and ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 held forward again To ensure sunroof is fully closed press and hold switch until sunroof has completely stopped moving Express Mode Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an obstruc tion in the path of the sunroof is d
275. peration of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturers specifica tions should be obtained immediately 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected for a prolonged period Crankcase Emission Control System Proper operation of this system depends on freedom from sticking or plugging due to deposits As vehicle mileage builds up the PCV valve and passages may accumulate deposits If a valve is not working properly replace it with a new valve Do not attempt to clean the old PCV valve Check the vent
276. ported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names with four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two c
277. portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up WARNING on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen
278. properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal
279. ps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area immediately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories con tain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling CAUTION It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive 4 and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion Apply grease to posts and clamps after tightening If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage as battery damage can result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 Air Conditioner Maintenance 7 WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time e Use only refrigerants and co
280. pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Don t leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Automatic Locking Retractor ALR To operate the switchable retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is all removed from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacture NOTE To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether
281. r Passenger s Side Adjust the convex passenger s side outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped Folding the Outside Mirrors The exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved manually either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Power Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped The controls for the power mirrors are located on the driver s door trim panel Power Mirror Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror Passenger Side Mirror Directions To adjust a mirror turn the con
282. r s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are A
283. r Indicators l l 297 Trip Odometer sre ss er Ren 179 Trip Odometer Reset Button 177 Turn Signals inet Rma 123 173 389 UConnect Hands Free Phone 82 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 170 Uniform Tire Quality Grades Universal Transmitter 005 434 INDEX M Unleaded Gasoline 0000 311 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 000 370 Vanity Mirrors scc e eee et SR PE Ss 82 Variance Compass 6 eee 191 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading sess 288 317 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage ess eek eR AEXRERER E SES 385 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 172 Warning Roll Over 0 0 60 a aa 4 Warnings and Cautions 00 4 7 Warranty Information 06 412 Washer Adding Fluid 0 00040 163 Washers Windshield lesse 128 Washing Vehicle 6 0 2 0000 377 Wheel Alignment and Balance 300 Wheel and Wheel Trim lessen 378 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 378 Wind Buffeting ci eR eae ea es 152 Window Airbag Side Curtain 49 54 Window Fogging 0 0 0 0 ee eee eee 233 Windows lees 32 POWE wie Fas dies ie hed bee SEs daw ee 32 Windshield Washers
284. r can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad vanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Control System TCS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Hill Decent Control HDC and Elec tronic Stability Program ESP All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in this Section of the manual for more information about ABS ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quic
285. r designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phone book For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete
286. r snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost W Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets Use this mode with maximum fan and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Air Outlets The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control air flow ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen gers the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward the left rear passenger Fan Control Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control from left OFF to right 81cab396 Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area
287. r your engine before consider ing service for the vehicle Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components 312 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasolines o
288. ranty Information U S Vehicles Only 412 Be Reasonable With Requests 40 WBMOPAR 9Parts selle 413 H If You Need Assistance sese 409 Wi Reporting Safety Defects 413 Chrysler LLC Customer Center 410 In The 50 United States And Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 410 Washington Due In Mexico Contact 411 ICAO wpoqidexwbeeesirabigak ug 408 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M li Publication Order Forms 414 Traction Grades 6 2 eee ee ee ee ee ee 415 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades itani i 416 Quality Grades i sisse Rn 415 Treadwear eee 415 EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 409 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of ite
289. rds and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched OFF This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storin
290. re off the object without causing further damage This stuck in mud sand or snow try spinning your tires should be tried before attempting any recovery method during this process to clean the debris from the tread and improve the traction You want to create a rocking motion with the vehicle This helps build vehicle momentum which hopefully gets you out Remember Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle without first to ease off and on the accelerator before and after the clearing the object may result in additional under shift If after a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free body damage stop and try another method of recovery Continuous rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to your vehicle and the environment es STARTING AND OPERATING 273 CAUTION Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an excessive high speed Do not spin your tires faster than an indicated 30 mph 48 km h Do not spin the wheels continuously for more than 30 seconds e Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap Tow straps are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle which is not stuck The tow hooks on your vehicle are de signed to take the abusive force generated during vehicle recovery Do not use the bumper or any other vehicle component as an attachment point Using tow straps requires coordination between the two drivers Good communication and line of sight are required for
291. re engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP in this Section of this manual Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 NOTE Anytime the ESP system is in the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP for a complete explanation of the avail able ESP modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roa
292. resulting in loss of vehicle control 292 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 811adOdO Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once
293. rminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the E UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is u
294. rs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed A gASCAP message will be dis played in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M RESET button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of this vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that
295. rs Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced TREAD WEAR INDICATOR e Ai f eat These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 298 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and
296. s evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 Tongue Weight TW The Tongue Weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weigh
297. s is considered the responsibility of the owner 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mo par cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain w
298. s is where the compass sensor is located COMPASS VARIANCE MAP e000cbab 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M To Set the Variance With the ignition in the ON position quickly less than one second press and release the EVIC button several times until you have displayed the Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu Once in the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu press and release less than one second the EVIC button several times until Compass Variance is highlighted The Compass Variance message and the current variance zone number will be displayed To change the zone press and hold longer than two sec onds the EVIC button to increment the variance one step Repeat as necessary with individual long for at least 1 second EVIC button presses for each increment until the desired variance is achieved To exit the Vari ance Programming press the EVIC button with a short less than one second button press NOTE The factory default is Zone 8 During program ming the zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to Zone 1 Compass Calibration The Compass will automatically calibrate if the Cal indicator is flashing by driving around slowly under 5 mph 8 km h in one or more complete circles in an area free from large metallic objects or power lines until the Cal indicator turns off If during normal use the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to manuall
299. s not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint system The driver s airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove com partment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers DRIVER AIRBAG PASSENGER AIRBAG KNEE BOLSTER KNEE BOLSTER 81913a96 Front Airbags and Knee Bolsters NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forc
300. s will flash on twice The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 NOTE The system can also be programmed to unlock all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button On EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Remote Unlock Driv ers Door 1st under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 For vehicles not equipped with an EVIC the system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed key fob 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to react
301. s without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning ON OFF the ignition will cancel the MUTE feature ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time PSCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan through preset stations in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each preset station before continuing to the next To stop the search press PSCAN a second time TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display for five seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE AUDIO con trol 3 After the hours are adjusted press the TUNE AUDIO control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the TUNE AUDIO contr
302. sheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the seat belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the seat belts from the car to wash them Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft cloth 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN FUSES INTEGRATED POWER MODULE IPM Cavity Cartridge Mini Description An Integrated Power Module IPM is located in the Fuse Fuse engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This 6 10Amp IOD Sw Pwr Mir center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label Red Ocm Steering Cntrl that identifies each component may be pr
303. side of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal LOAD ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and ho
304. sing e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change opera tion only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the PHONE button to begin ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to tha
305. sly Variable Automatic Transaxle CVT 236 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Bl AutoStick If Equipped AutoStick Operation 0 AutoStick General Information ll Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped ll Freedom Drive II Safe Off Road Driving Off Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics 04004 8 cabin een eee aes Freedom Drive II 4WD System Operation Freedom Drive II Off Road Features High Mobility Characteristics Water Fording Characteristics The Basics Of Off Road Driving When To Use Low L Off Road With The AWD Lock Lever Engaged 252 253 254 255 257 259 Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation 260 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 260 Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points exeat eR Regn 262 Hill Climbing 000000 264 Driving Through Water 268 Airing Down For Off Road Driving 270 Vehicle Recovery lees 271 After Driving Off Road ll 274 E Driving On Slippery Surfaces L 275 Acceleration 4 verae ea ne 275 Traction 22e ERR SR UR RESO EUG 276 W Parking Brake ong RR RE 276 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 237
306. switch To enable the window con trols press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time Window Lockout Switch LIFTGATE NOTE The key that is used to start the vehicle is also used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate To unlock the liftgate insert the key into the lock and turn to the right manual lock models only The liftgate can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors The central locking unlocking feature if equipped can also be activated from the liftgate key cylinder 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed without using the key To open the liftgate squeeze the liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion Opening The Liftgate NOTE In the event of a power malfunction or the RKE transmitter is inoperative insert the key into the liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right manual lock models only Using the liftgate handle pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a snap in cap that provides access to release the latch in the event of an electrical system malfunction ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS i Some of the most important safety f
307. t for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say m Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a pagi
308. t has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft lbs 135 N m If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 9 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 10 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area Have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately 11 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct pressure as required 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES DUE TO A LOW BATTERY WARNING WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever axle cannot be started this way and may be damaged Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan once th
309. t least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9kg but are younger than one year old Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e The belt positioning booster seat is for children we
310. t must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Tires Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact Heg i spare tire Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection procedure vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possi
311. t to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements 320 STARTING AND OPERATING M tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the WARNINGI correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions system may reduce handling stability and braking Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry performance and could result in an accident Standards Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Duty Vehicle dealer for additional information Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Heavy Duty Trailer Hit
312. th power door locks if 1 The Auto Unlock feature is enabled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The drivers door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped in Section 4 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK PEN position 80e54ed7 Ignition Key Position 3 Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming NOTE Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock features in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors If Equipped Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position Child Protection Door Lock Location ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Inserting Ignition Key WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from th
313. th the 4WD Lock Lever Engaged When driving off road shift into low L Off Road and activate the 4WD LOCK This will provide additional traction and activates the numerous off road features to improve handling and control on slippery or difficult terrain Due to the sustained lower gearing low L Off Road with 4WD Lock engaged will allow the engine to operate in a higher power range This will allow you to cross over obstacles and descend hills with improved control and less effort Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation Many off road driving conditions require the simulta neous use of the brake and throttle two footed driving When climbing rocks logs or other stepped objects using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline Driving in Snow Mud and Sand There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in snow mud or sand The vehicle will be less responsive to steering acceleration and braking inputs Therefore you should accelerate slowly leave greater stopping distances and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers You want to keep a slow constant steady pace The key is to maintain the vehicle s momentum e Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds activate the 4WD LOCK and shift the transmission to low L Off Road if necessary Don t shift to a lower
314. the accelerator pedal and repeat the Normal Starting pro cedure WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine mm warms up 242 STARTING AND OPERATING MANUAL TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly depress the accelera tor pedal 80f7bc4b 5 Speed Shift Pattern Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transaxle is in 1st gear not 3rd when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in 3rd gear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 243 For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations 5th gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and never try to hold the
315. the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if the vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test the vehicle may fail the test This vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if this vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn the ignition key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine This means that the vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine This means that the vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If the OBD II system is not ready you shou
316. the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UConnect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say the Setup Voice Training command ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Repeat the wo
317. the next four digits Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all 12 ESN SID digits display The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits display The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or five minutes have passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access with RAO and RAK Radios With the ignition switch in the ACC position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simul taneously for three seconds All twelve ESN SID num bers will display The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or five minutes have passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access with REC Navigation Radios Please refer to your Navigation User s Manual 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M With the ignition in the ACC position and the radio off press the CD Bject and SET buttons simultaneously until the 12 digits of the ESN SID appear on the screen Selecting Satellite Mode in REF RAQ And RAK Radios Selecting Satellite Mode REF Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting Satellite Mode RAQ and RAK Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display These radios will also display the current station name and program type For more information su
318. tial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION TIRE MARKINGS SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD 9 ee 48 cy ZE V s MAXIMUM DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY S AND RUM DARDS b moomoo TEMPERATURE Bi bars at N S GRADES SINE 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H e LT Light Truck STARTING AND OPERATING 283 European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed t
319. ting the system during the winter months make sure the air intake directly in front of the wind shield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake plenum may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of vehicle operation 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is at each end of the instrument panel These nonadjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in either the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures 00 0 239 Manual Transmission ess 239 Automatic Transmission 239 Normal Starting cesigas tracis biana 240 Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C 04 240 If Engine Fails To Start 241 After Staring osceni oder pie be pst 241 ll Manual Transaxle If Equipped Recommended Shift Speeds Downshifting Automatic Transaxle If Equipped Brake Transmission Interlock System Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock DY SCM isses chia n eu ed ea iade 3 Gear Ranges For Continuou
320. tion gc bts ae eee ghee ee 69 Overheating 0 t kae pa e 332 Temperature Gauge s oec n en 177 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 56 Event Data Recorder ser obe Re s 58 Exhaust Gas Caution 35 69 314 364 Exhaust 5ystem i aedoes i barbe ran e 364 Fabric Cate secessit xn sedes xe ed 378 Filters Air Cleaner si eiaei ea bein eed 358 Engine Fuel i zpsekk fer RESI ids goes 358 Engine Oll ocak eas rr OUR UTR 355 396 Flashers 04 22s RR ERR RE 332 Hazard Warning 00 000 e eee 332 Tur signal oes genes pS E 389 Plat Tire Stowage sse m a 339 Flooded Engine Starting issus 241 en INDEX 423 Fluid Brake esegue une be EES 397 Fluid Capacities 1 6 eee eee 395 Fluid Leaks iiu sus bru ROUTER 7 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle 0 eee 374 Elide ome ecrit a Pen nate ate een dta edis 396 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 396 Fog lights i 2 2 rm RR RP 123 181 389 Fold Down Speakers 000000 161 Folding Rear Seat ic24 Ie rcr 116 Folding Rear Seat Sedan iiis 116 Four Wheel Drive llle 251 SYSTEMS esu peser bib xn hts 251 Four Wheel Drive Operation 251 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 040 342 Fuel aces ee de datas pt ad eld RE Se ewe Se ee 311 396 Adding 222599 nenta dat aee eda 4 314 Additives viu desde aw aca ab 313 Capacity usse cere ua vg nii Heg ne s 395
321. to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely from side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents TOW Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight HEIGHT stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 81546c40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers EN STARTING AND OPERATING 323 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 mi 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may
322. tor units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli sion severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time that it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME e The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbag is designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC with side impact option detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated
323. training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 in 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light
324. trol wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move When you are finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Vanity Mirrors If Equipped To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward m s pc uM M M M uH AA Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Sliding Feature The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended coverage of the side glass HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER REN and REU radios contain an integrated Hands Free Communication UConnect system Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for these radios UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 NOTE The UConnect system requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the UConnect website for sup
325. ts Sports Information Information m D Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 News News Weather Weather 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SET DIR Button Radio Mode To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET DIR but ton The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET DIR button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used
326. uation Having another vehicle with you usually works best for most situations The first thing to do is assess the situation Why are you stuck Are you hung up on something Would it be easier to go forward or to go backward Can you still move the vehicle Are you alone or do you have another vehicle to help Is there high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process Answering these questions will help you determine the best method of recovery If you can still move the vehicle slightly and the only issue is slick ground then rock cycling your vehicle would be the first choice If you have ample room an additional vehicle and there is low risk of vehicle impingement on the 272 STARTING AND OPERATING EE surroundings then using a tow strap to the vehicle tow e Rock Cycling Your Vehicle Rock cycling your ve hooks would be fast and easy If the vehicle is severely hicle is one of the easiest fastest and most commonly hung up or in a situation where great care needs to be used methods This simply involves shifting your taken during the recovery then nothing can do the job vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE while applying better than a winch If you are severely hung up on throttle after each shift During this process for addi something you should jack the vehicle up and stack tional traction try turning your steering wheel quickly something under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll back and forth no more than a 1 4 turn If you a
327. uency Of Fluid Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule under Section 8 Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD AWD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts under Section 8 Fluid Level Check Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected Check the fluid level by removing 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained be tween the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 in 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule under Section 8 Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What C
328. ufacturer Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to 314 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Carbon Monoxide Warnings e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time WARNING the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly windows fully open Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill ADDING FUEL Never run the engine in a closed area such as a Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period of time If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside
329. und a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading 818168a4 Engine Oil Dipstick Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick The
330. under Oil Change Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ee Once a Month At Each Oil Change e Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Change the engine oil filter anaes e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake CAUTION master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle e Check the manual transmission fluid level e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 403 Required Maintenance Intervals M A N Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mile r age are
331. urface of the hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber Particu lar attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed NOTE Often fluids such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings There fore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not neces sarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before a hose is replaced based on leakage 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be done when ever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the brake system warning light is on Be sure to clean the top of th
332. use signal blockage REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches BACK VIEW OF STEERING WHEEL 818fcae7 The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Press the top of the switch to SEEK up to the next listenable station Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK down to the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbuttons CD Player Press the top of the switch once to go to the next track on the CD Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twi
333. utton Radio Mode To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Preset Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operating Instructions CD Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Inserting The Compact Disc Single CD Player Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pull
334. ve acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over the battery when attaching the clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in your eyes or on your skin flush the contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact 6 If the vehicle is equipped with a Sentry Key Immo bilizer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START position 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the se quence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con trol or ESP turn the system OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around t
335. will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 23 4WD Indicator Light This light indicates the vehicle is in 4WD Locked mode 24 OdometerlTrip Odometer A vacuum fluorescent display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven Also the cluster will display replacing the odometer trip odometer vehicle warning messages such as
336. will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
337. will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 306 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four whee
338. y Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone balance and fade RND PTY Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for five seconds If no action is taken during the five second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the PTY button or turning the TUNE rotary knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Toggle the PTY button to select the following format Program Type 16 Digit Character types Display Proeram Type 16 Digit Character Nostalgia Nostalgia 8 yp Display Oldies Oldies No A ype or un None Personality Personality a nem Public Public E u d its a i i its Rhythm and Blues Rhythm and Blues a ain Religious Music Religious Music Classica asica Religious Talk Religious_Talk Classic Rock Classic_Rock Rock Rock College College Soft Soft Country Country Soft Rock Soft_Rock Emergency Test Emergency Test Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_ amp _B Foreign Language Foreign_Language Spor
339. y calibrate the compass Prior to calibrating the compass make sure the proper zone is selected To Manually Calibrate the Compass Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position Using a short button press less than one second press and release the EVIC button several times until the EVIC displays the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu Once in the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu press and re lease less than one second the EVIC button several times until Calibrate Compass Yes is displayed Using a long button press more than one second pressing the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 EVIC button will place the Compass in calibration mode The Cal indicator will come on continuously in the EVIC display to indicate that the compass is now in the calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven to calibrate A short EVIC button press from the Cali brate Compass Yes screen will exit the EVIC Customer Programmable features and return it to its normal oper ating mode To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION RADIO BROADCAST SIGNALS The radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Li
340. y increases the risk of injury and vehicle damage Always keep everyone at least 30 ft 9 m away from a strapping or winching situation After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After driving off road it is always a good idea to check for damage e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard or they might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have brake drums and rotors brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for packed material Packed foreign material can cause a wheel imbalance and cleaning the wheels will correct the situation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 WARNING DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES ACCELERATION Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip excessive wear
341. y is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur Refer to Engine Oil under Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MIN ERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed WARNING If you are required to drive with the deck lid liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for
342. ype is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play seven seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search Pressing a preset memory button during a music type scan will call up the memory channel and stop the search PTY Button SEEK When the desired program is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception on vehicles available with a luggage rack do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased perfor mance Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can ca

2 - Jeep

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents